2005 Dakota Owners Manual

SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 3
4 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 8
9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 10
INTRODUCTION 1
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Modifications / Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . 6
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION WARNING!
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and known to the State of California to cause cancer and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
aware of all safety warnings. Consult the table of contents to determine which section
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer contains the information you desire.
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained techni- The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
cians and genuine Mopar威 parts, and is interested in complete listing of all subjects.
your satisfaction.
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This manual contains WARNINGS against operating 1
procedures which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is found on a
stamped plate located on the left front corner of the
instrument panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle
through the windshield. This number also appears on the
Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a
window on your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient
record of your vehicle identification number and optional
equipment.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN plate.
6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety
and may lead to an accident resulting in serious
injury or death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 ▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 ▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Sentry Key — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 ▫ Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
䡵 Ignition And Steering Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 䡵 Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Manual Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 ▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Automatic Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 ▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
䡵 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 ▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks . . . .15 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 ▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . .25
8 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 ▫ Automatic Locking Mode (If Equipped) . . . . . .38

䡵 Security Alarm System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .27 ▫ Center Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
▫ To Set The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 ▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 ▫ Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Auto Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental
▫ Window Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Restraint System (SRS)—Airbags . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Sliding Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch – If
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 ▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 ▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . .37 䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .72
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 9
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The 2
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Key-In-Ignition Reminder

The double sided keys may be inserted into the locks If you open the driver’s door when the key is in the
with either side up. The keys for your new vehicle are ignition lock, a continuous chime will sound to remind
enclosed in a plastic bag with a bar code label affixed to you to remove the key.
the front. The bar code can be used to order duplicate
keys from your dealer or a locksmith. If you received
your keys without the bag, ask your dealer to give you CAUTION!
the number. An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
NOTE: Integrated keys (key and key fob combined) Always remove the key from the ignition and lock
must be cut by the dealer. The dealer must have cutters all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
that have enough clearance for integrated keys.
SENTRY KEY — IF EQUIPPED NOTE: The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not
With this system, an electronically coded ignition key compatible with remote starting systems. Use of these
sends a signal to the vehicle electronics. If the electronics systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a
recognizes the signal, the vehicle will start and continue loss of security protection. Additional Sentry Keys or 2
to run. If the system does not recognize the signal, the Mobil Speed-pass™ devices held against or immediately
vehicle will start and run for 2 seconds, then shut off. adjacent to the ignition key when starting the engine may
After six unsuccessful attempts at starting, the system cause vehicle starting problems. If a problem occurs,
will shut down until the correct key is used. remove the Sentry Key from the key-ring and attempt to
start the vehicle again. Pagers, cell phones, walkman, etc.
NOTE: If the key is in the ignition switch, then all
will have no effect on this system.
buttons on that transmitter will be disabled. The buttons
on the remaining transmitters will work. If the vehicle is
moving 5 mph or more, then all the transmitter buttons
are disabled for all keys.
The ⬙Security Light⬙ will illuminate for about 3 seconds At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON with a four digit PIN number. This number is required
position. If the vehicle electronics do not receive a valid for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may
signal from the ignition key, the ⬙Security Light⬙ will flash be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the
continuously to signal that the vehicle has been immobi- Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure
lized. If the ⬙Security Light⬙ remains on during vehicle consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle
operation, it indicates a fault in the system electronics. If electronics. A blank key is one which has never been
this option was ordered, all of the keys provided with programmed and needs to be cut.
your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key System serviced,
electronics.
bring all vehicle keys to the dealer.
Replacement Keys
Customer Key Programming
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the You can program new keys to the system if you have two
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once valid keys by doing the following:
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition and turn the
be programmed to any other vehicle.
ignition to the ON position for at least 3 seconds but no
longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition back to the OFF
position and remove the first key.
2. Insert the second valid key and switch the ignition to 2. This device must accept any interference that may be
the ON position within 15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a received including interference that may cause undesired
chime will sound and the ⬙Security Light⬙ will begin to operation.
flash. Turn the ignition back to the OFF position and
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
2
remove the second key.
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
3. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition and switch void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
the ignition to the ON position within 60 seconds of
having removed the second key. After 10 seconds, a IGNITION AND STEERING LOCK
single chime will sound. The ⬙Security Light⬙ will stop Insert the key fully, and then turn the switch to one of the
flashing, then turn on for 3 seconds; then turn off. five illustrated positions. The key can be inserted or
withdrawn only in the LOCK position.
The new Sentry Key has been programmed. Repeat this
process to program up to a total of 8 keys. Manual Transmissions
When the steering wheel is in the LOCK position, the
General Information steering and ignition systems are locked to provide
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with antitheft protection for your vehicle. It may be difficult to
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the turn the key from the LOCK position when starting your
following conditions: vehicle. Move the steering wheel left and right while
1. This device may not cause harmful interference. turning the key until it turns easily. To remove the key,
depress and hold the release button located between the Automatic Transmissions
ignition switch and the instrument panel. Turn the igni- In the LOCK position, the steering and ignition systems
tion key to LOCK and remove the key. are locked to provide antitheft protection for your ve-
hicle. It may be difficult to turn the key from the LOCK
position when starting your vehicle. Move the steering
wheel left and right while turning the key until it turns
easily. The key can be inserted or withdrawn only in the
LOCK position. Push in on the key in the ignition lock
cylinder to rotate to the LOCK position.
NOTE: The steering wheel will the lock when the key is
removed, and the steering wheel is turned around 115
degrees from center clockwise and around 65 degrees
counterclockwise.
Manual Transmissions
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks
All interior lights will illuminate in the vehicle when the
doors are unlocked using the key fob.
2
The interior lights will remain on for 30 seconds after the
last door is closed, or until all doors are closed and either
the ignition is turned to the ON position or a key fob
LOCK button is pressed.
There is also a battery saver feature that will turn the
interior lights off after 8 minutes if the ignition is OFF
Automatic Transmissions and a door is left open or the dimmer control is in the
interior lights ON position.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission, the key cannot be turned to LOCK until the
selector is in the PARK position. Do not attempt to pull
the shift lever out of PARK after the key is in the LOCK
position.
DOOR LOCKS WARNING!

Manual Door Locks
All the doors can be “manually” locked from the inside When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
by pushing down the door lock plunger, located at the from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do not
rear of the door. Both front doors may be opened from the leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with
inside with the door lock plunger in the down or locked access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
position. vehicle equipment may cause severe personal inju-
ries and death.
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
Vehicles equipped with power door locks can be locked

or unlocked from inside by either the use of the door lock
switches located on the front doors or by pressing the
LOCK or UNLOCK buttons on the Remote Keyless Entry
key fob.
As a safety feature the doors will not lock when using the 4. Within 10 seconds, cycle the key from the OFF position
door lock switches during the following conditions: to the ON position four times; ending in the ON position
( Do not start the engine ).
• The driver’s door is open while the key is in the
ignition. 5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
in the LOCK direction.
Automatic Door Locks
If this feature is enabled, your door locks will lock 6. A single chime will be heard to indicate the feature has
automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph been disabled.
(24 km/h).
7. To re-activate this feature, repeat the above steps.
This feature is enabled when your vehicle is shipped
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
from the assembly plant and can be disabled by using the
before the feature could be disabled. If necessary, repeat
following procedure:
the above procedure.
1. Enter your vehicle and Close all doors.
Auto Unlock Feature
2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seat belt will This feature unlocks all the doors of the vehicle when any
cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this door is opened. The following must be met:
programming procedure).
• The Automatic Door Lock feature must be enabled.
3. Place the key into the ignition.
• The doors of the vehicle must be locked automatically 3. Insert the key into the ignition.
by the Automatic Door Lock feature.
4. Within 10 seconds, cycle the key from the OFF position
• The vehicle is in P (Park) and the ignition switch is in to the ON position four times ending in the ON position
any key position. (do not start the engine).
2
This feature will not operate if any of the conditions 5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
above are not met or following has occurred: in the UNLOCK direction.
• Any manual operation of a door lock switch has 6. A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has
occurred. been changed.
NOTE: This customer programmable feature is enabled 7. To reactivate the feature, repeat the above steps.
when your vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant.
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
Auto Unlock Feature Programming before the feature could be changed. If necessary repeat
Customer Programming sequence to disable or enable: the above procedure.
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt (fastening the seat belt will cancel
any chiming that may be confusing during this program-
ming procedure).
Child Protection Door Lock

To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have the child-
protection door lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door and slide the
control UP to engage the locks and DOWN to disengage
the child-protection locks. When the system on a door is
engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
WARNING! REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.

Remember that the rear doors can only be opened 2
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE: After setting the child protection door lock

system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window and open the door with the outside This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors or
door handle. activate the panic alarm from distances a minimum of 66
feet (20 meters) using a hand held radio transmitter. The
transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate
the system.
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked 3. Release both buttons at the same time.
with metal objects.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
To unlock the doors: pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the keyfob.
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob while
once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice to unlock
you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security
all the doors. When the UNLOCK button is pressed, the
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
illuminated entry will initiate, and the parking lights will
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
flash on twice.
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors
5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
following procedure:
To lock the doors:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
Press and release the LOCK button on the key fob to lock
key fob.
all doors. If the ignition is OFF, when the doors are
2. Continue to hold the LOCK button at least 4 seconds, locked, the parking lights will flash on once and the horn
but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold the will chirp once.
UNLOCK button. A single chime will sound to indicate
that this feature has changed.
Horn Chirp Programming Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
The horn chirp feature will be shipped from the assembly will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
plants activated. If desired this feature can be disabled by to deactivate the Security Alarm.
using the following procedure:
6. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
2
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on the key fob. reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
2. After holding the LOCK button for four seconds, also Flash Lamps with Lock Programming
press the PANIC button within 6 seconds. A single chime
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key fob.
will sound to indicate that this feature has changed.
2. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds,
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
also press the LOCK button within 6 seconds. A single
4. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps. chime will sound to indicate that this feature has
changed.
5. Test the horn chirp feature while outside of the ve-
hicle, by pressing the LOCK button on the key fob with 3. Release both buttons at the same time.
the ignition in the OFF position and the key removed.
4. Test the flash lamps with LOCK feature while outside
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob, while of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK button on the key
you are inside the vehicle, will activate the Security fob with the ignition in the OFF position, and the key
removed.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the key fob, while Mode, the door locks and remote keyless entry systems
you are in the vehicle, will activate the Security Alarm. will function normally. Panic mode will not disarm the
Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will security system on vehicles so equipped.
cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to
General Information
deactivate the Security Alarm.
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps. following conditions:
Using the Panic Alarm 1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is OFF press
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
and release the PANIC button on the transmitter once.
received including interference that may cause undesired
When the Panic mode is activated, the interior lights will
operation.
illuminate, the headlamps and parking lights will flash,
and the horn will sound. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
To cancel the Panic mode press and release the PANIC
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
button on the transmitter a second time. Panic mode will
automatically cancel after 3 minutes or if the vehicle is If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate from a
started or exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). During the Panic normal distance, check for these two conditions.
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of 2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seatbelt will cancel
batteries is five years. any chiming that may confuse you during this program-
ming procedure).
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile 3. Place the key into the ignition.
2
or CB radios.
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position ( Do not start the
Programming Additional Transmitters engine ).
Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with
5. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key fob.
two key fob transmitters programmed only for that
vehicle. A total of eight fobs can be programmed for your 6. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds,
vehicle. Additional fobs can be programmed to your also press the PANIC button within 6 seconds.
vehicle through the use of a currently programmed fob.
7. When a single chime is heard release both buttons. The
NOTE: When entering program mode using that fob, all chime is an indication that you have successfully entered
other programmed fobs will be erased and you will have program mode. All fobs that are to be programmed must
to reprogram them for your vehicle. be done so within 60 seconds of when the chime was
heard.
Use the Following procedure to program additional key
fobs if the vehicle is not equipped with Sentry Key:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
8. Using the fob to be programmed, press and release Battery Replacement

both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, simultaneously The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
for 2 seconds and then release.
1. If the key fob is equipped with a screw, remove the
9. Press and release the UNLOCK button a single chime screw. With the transmitter buttons facing down, use a
will be heard. flat blade to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart.
Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during
10. Repeat steps 8 and 9 to program up to six additional
removal.
fobs.
11. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
12. Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to 60
seconds from when the original chime was heard. After
60 seconds, all programmed fobs function normally.
NOTE: If you do not have a programmed transmitter,
contact your dealer for details.
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the To Set the Alarm:
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause The alarm will set when you use the power door locks or
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with use the Keyless Entry transmitter to lock the doors. After
rubbing alcohol. all the doors are locked and closed the security light in 2
the instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the
3. To assemble the transmitter case, snap the two halves
system is arming. The security light in the instrument
together.
panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 15 seconds to
NOTE: If the key fob is equipped with a screw, reinstall indicate that the alarm is being set. After the alarm is set,
and tighten the screw until snug. the security light will flash at a slower rate to indicate
that the system is armed.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system monitors the vehicle doors and ignition for NOTE: If the security light stays on continuously during
unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the vehicle operation, have the system checked by your
system provides both audible and visual signals. The dealer.
horn will sound repeatedly for 3 minutes and the head-
lights and security light in the instrument cluster will
flash for an additional 15 minutes. The engine will not
run until the system is disarmed.
To Disarm the System: The security alarm system is designed to protect your
Use the Keyless Entry transmitter to unlock the doors. If vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
something has triggered the system in your absence, the system will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in the
horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors. vehicle and lock the doors with the transmitter, the alarm
Check the vehicle for tampering. will sound when you pull the door handle to exit.
The security system will also disarm, if the vehicle is NOTE: You may accidentally activate the security sys-
started with a programmed Sentry Key. If an unpro- tem (horn sounds and lights flash) by entering the vehicle
grammed Sentry Key is used to start a vehicle, the engine without using the key fob to unlock the door(s). The
will start and run for 2 seconds and then shut down. security system can be disarmed with the key fob’s
After six unsuccessful attempts at starting the engine, the UNLOCK button or by inserting a programmed Sentry
system will shut down until the correct key is used. To Key into the ignition and turning the key to the ON
exit alarming mode, press the RKE Unlock button or start position.
the vehicle with a programmed Sentry Key.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
2
The control on the left front door has up-down switches

that give you finger tip control of all four power win-
dows. There is a single opening and closing switch on the
passenger doors for passenger window control. The
windows will operate only when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position and for ten minutes after the
ignition is turned OFF or the driver’s door is opened.

This feature can be turned off by your authorized dealer.
NOTE: The Power Accessory Delay feature will allow
the power windows to operate for ten minutes after the
ignition it turned OFF.
Auto Down
The driver’s window switch has an Auto Down feature.
Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and
the window will go down automatically. To cancel the
Auto Down movement, operate the switch in either the
up or down direction and release the switch.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window lock button. To enable the window controls,
press the window control button again.
Sliding Rear Window WIND BUFFETING

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the 2
windows down or partially open.. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs
with the rear windows open, open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, knee
Sliding Window Light Latch bolsters, front airbags for both the driver and front
A locking device in the center of the window helps to passenger, and if equipped left and right side curtain
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the airbags for the driver and passengers seated next to a
lock to release the window. window. If you will be carrying children too small for
adult-size seat belts, your seat belts or the LATCH feature
(refer to the Child Restraint section in this manual), can
be used to hold infant and child restraint systems.
Please pay close attention to the information in this Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and that
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
possible. thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
WARNING! inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer Lap/Shoulder Belts
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck- All seating positions except the front center seating
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or position (with full bench seat) have combination lap/
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your lock during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature
vehicle are buckled up properly. allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with
you under normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even will lock and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver the vehicle or being thrown out.
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
WARNING! WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people belts are designed to go around the large bones of 2
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously your body. These are the strongest parts of your
injured or killed. body and can take the forces of a collision the
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. make your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instruc-
using a seat belt properly.
tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for
more than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
your lap.
adjust the seat.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch
WARNING! 4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
• A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt 2
your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In
a sudden stop you could move too far forward, increas-
ing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle
in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. And a
belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries.
Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt
over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to
hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be
used together.
WARNING! 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t allow the belt to retract fully.
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos- WARNING!
sible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight. and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
to your dealer and have it fixed. parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor etc.).
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

In the front row outboard seats, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt
away from your neck. Push in on the anchorage release 2
button to release the anchorage, and then move it up or
down to the position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will

prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in the desired position.
The adjuster has an easy up (EZ Up) feature, which will
allow it to be moved up without engaging the button.
Automatic Locking Mode (if equipped) loose end of the webbing. Wear the lap belt snug against
To convert from the normal emergency locking mode to the hips. Sit back and erect in the seat, then adjust the belt
the automatic locking mode, grasp the shoulder belt as tightly as is comfortable.
portion and pull all of the webbing out of the retractor.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Allow some of the webbing to retract into the retractor, as
The seat belts for front outboard seating positions are
the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound to indicate
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
the seat belt is now in the automatic locking mode. Once
remove any slack from the seat belt system in the event of
the automatic locking mode has been activated, you will
a collision. These devices improve the performance of the
not be able pull the webbing back out of the retractor. To
seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the
disengage the automatic locking mode, simply allow the
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all
seat belt to retract fully into the retractor to return the seat
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
belt to the normal emergency locking mode.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
Center Lap Belts
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
The center seat position on the front seat bench has a lap
worn snugly and positioned properly.
belt only. To fasten the lap belt, slide the latch plate into
the buckle until you hear a “click.” To lengthen the lap
belt, tilt the latch plate and pull. To remove slack, pull the
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10
straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretension- seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8
ers are single use items. After a collision that is severe km/h).
enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners, both
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be en-
2
must be replaced.
abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System following these steps:
(BeltAlert)
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is
or START position. DaimlerChrysler does not recom-
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning
mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System
System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat
(BeltAlert).
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to buckle the driver’s seat belt.
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96
2. Start the engine and wait for the Seat Belt Warning
seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The
Light to turn off.
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least three We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts
times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is
buckled. the best way to keep the baby safe.
4. Turn off the engine. A single chime will sound to Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
signify that you have successfully completed the pro- across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible.
gramming. Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reacti-
the force if there is a collision.
vated by repeating this procedure.
Seat Belt Extender
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, your
(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s seat
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
belt remains unbuckled.
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender and store it.
WARNING! Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental

Restraint System (SRS)—Airbags
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use the 2
seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long
enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the extender when not needed.
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
steering wheel. The passenger front airbag is mounted in
the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The WARNING!

words SRS/AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.
• Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
regulations that allow less forceful deployment. damage the airbags and you could be injured be-
cause the airbags are not there to protect you. These
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
protective covers for the airbag cushions are de-
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation signed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
that are based on collision severity and occupant size. • If your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do
Also, the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to
regulations that define Occupant Classification (Refer to block the location of the window bag. The area
⬙Occupant Classification System⬙ in this section). where the window bag is located should remain free
from any obstructions.
This vehicle may also be equipped with window bags to • If your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do
protect the driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next not have any accessory items installed which will
to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with window alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
bags, they are located above the side windows. Their vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG. nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on
the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior vehicle for any reason.
trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
Along with the seat belts, front airbags work with the airbags work, you need the seat belts to keep you in the
instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved right position for the airbags to protect you properly.
protection for the driver and front passenger. Window
Here are some simple steps you can follow to minimize
bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
2
protection.
1. Children 12 years and under should always ride
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint.
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions. Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag.
NOTE: The passenger front airbag may not deploy even
An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to
when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classi-
infants in that position.
fication System (refer to ⬙Occupant Classification System⬙
in this section) has determined the passenger seat is If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
empty or is occupied by someone that is classified in the passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
⬙small child⬙ category. seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint. See ⬙Child Restraint⬙ in this section.
If your vehicle is so equipped, the window bag on the
crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to You should read the instructions provided with your
severe side collisions. But even in collisions where the child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts WARNING!
properly.
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
back as far as practical to allow the airbag room to inflate.
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
4. If your vehicle has window bags, do not lean against some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
the door or window, airbags will inflate forcefully into Always wear your seat belts even though you
the space between you and the door. have airbags.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be • Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the ment panel during airbag deployment could cause
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in the ⬙If serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
You Need Customer Assistance⬙ section later in this back, comfortably extending your arms to reach
owner’s manual. the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• If the vehicle has window bags, they also need
room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or
window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
Air Bag System Components • Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
The airbag system consists of the following:
• Occupant Classification System (OCS) for the Front
• Occupant Restraint Controller Passenger Seat
2
• Side Remote Acceleration Sensors (If Equipped) − Occupant Classification Module
• Airbag Warning Light − Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
• Driver Airbag − Weight Sensors
• Passenger Airbag How the Airbag System Works
• Window Bags above Side Windows (If Equipped) • The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
• Steering Wheel and Column
airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are de-
• Instrument Panel signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation
from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC may
• Interconnecting Wiring
also modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant
• Knee Impact Bolsters size provided by the Occupant Classification Module.
The ORC will not detect roll over.
• Front Acceleration Sensors
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in if the light comes on again after initial start up.
the START or RUN positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the steering wheel and WARNING!
column, and knee bolsters. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, Ignoring the AIRBAG warning light in your instru-
the airbags are not on and will not inflate. ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not
During a moderate-to-severe rear impact the ORC may
come on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
deploy the seat belt pretensioners alone.
comes on as you drive, have the airbag system
Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning checked right away.
light and PAD indicator light in the instrument
panel for 6 to 8 seconds for a self-check when
• The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of
the ignition is first turned on. After the self-
a Federally regulated safety system required for this
check, the AIRBAG warning light will turn off. The PAD
vehicle. It is designed to turn off the front passenger
indicator light will function normally (Refer to ⬙Passen-
airbag in the unlikely event that a rear-facing infant
ger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light⬙ in this section).
seat is in the front passenger seat.
If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the
system, it turns on the AIRBAG warning light either
NOTE: Children 12 years and under should always ride If the passenger frontal air bag is automatically turned
buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint. off by the OCS, or by using the manual on/off switch
(on vehicles so equipped), the PAD Indicator lamp
iluminates the passenger frontal airbag symbol and 2
the word ⬙OFF⬙ to show that the passenger airbag will
not inflate during a collision requiring airbags.
When the right front passenger seat is empty or when
very light objects are placed on the seat, the passenger air
bag will not inflate even though the Passenger Airbag
Disable (PAD) indicator lamp is not illuminated.
The PAD indictor light should not be illuminated when
teenagers, most children in a forward facing child re-
straint or booster seats, most children that can properly
• The Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light wear the vehicle’s seat belt, and when an adult passenger
(an amber light located in the center of the instrument is properly seated in the front passenger seat. In this case,
panel) tells the driver and front passenger when the the air bag is ready to be inflated if a collision requiring
front passenger airbag is turned off. an airbag occurs.
For almost all properly installed rear facing child re- Passenger Airbag
straints, the PAD indicator light will be illuminated Front Passenger Seat Airbag
Disable (PAD)
indicating that the front passenger airbag is turned off Occupant Status
Indicator Light
and will not inflate. If the PAD indicator light is not Adult OFF ON
illuminated, DO NOT assume the air bag is turned off Grocery Bags, Heavy
and move the child restraint to the second row of seats (if Briefcases and Other
equipped). A deploying passenger air bag can cause ON OFF
Relatively Light
death or serious injury to a child in a rear facing infant Objects
seat. For vehicles with a manual on/off switch, the Empty or Very Small
passenger frontal airbag can be manually turned off. See OFF* OFF
Objects
section on how to use the switch later in this section. * Since the system senses weight, some small objects
NOTE: Even though this vehicle is equipped with an will turn the PAD Indicator Light on.
occupant classification system, children 12 years and The OCS classifies an occupant using weight sensors
under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat (if mounted in the base of the front passenger seat. Objects
equipped) in an appropriate child restraint (see section hanging on the seat or other passengers pushing down
on child restraints). on the seat will also be sensed. The weight of an adult
will cause the system to turn the airbag on. In this case,
the OCS has classified the occupant of the seat as an If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way, it
adult. An adult occupant needs to sit in a normal position should only be serviced by an authorized dealer. If the
(with their feet on or near the floor) in order to be seat is removed (or even if the seat attachment bolts are
properly classified. Reclining the seat back too far may loosened or tightened in any way), take the vehicle to an 2
change how an occupant is classified by the OCS. authorized dealer.
Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD If there is a fault present in the OCS, the Airbag Warning
Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding Light (a red light located in the center of the instrument
in the front passenger seat. If an adult occupant’s weight cluster directly in front of the driver) will be turned on.
is transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an
or instrument panel), the weight sensors in the seat may authorized dealer. The Airbag Warning Light is turned on
not properly classify the occupant. Objects lodged under whenever there is fault that can affect the operation of the
the seat or between the seat and the center console can airbag system. If there is a fault present in the OCS, both
prevent the occupant’s weight from being measured the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light
properly and may result in the occupant being improp- are illuminated to show that the passenger airbag is
erly classified. Ensure that the front passenger seat back turned off until the fault is cleared. If an object is lodged
does not touch anything placed behind the front passen- under the seat and interferes with operation of the weight
ger seat because this can also affect occupant classifica- sensors, a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD
tion.
Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light. Once the through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this
lodged object is removed, the fault will be automatically way the airbags do not interfere with your control of
cleared after a short period of time. the vehicle.
• The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are • The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is lo-
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right cated beneath the front passenger seat. The OCM
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a classifies the occupant into categories based on the
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator measurements made by the seat weight sensors. The
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to OCM communicates with the Occupant Restraint Con-
inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates troller (ORC). The ORC uses the occupant category to
may be possible based on collision severity and occu- determine whether the front passenger airbag should
pant size. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the be turned off. It also determines the rate of airbag
upper right side of the instrument panel separate and inflation during a collision.
fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size.
• The Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator
The bags fully inflate in about 50 - 70 milliseconds.
Light indicates to the driver and passenger when the
This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes.
airbag is turned OFF. In the presence of a properly
The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
seated occupant, when the PAD indicator light is
the driver and front passenger. The driver’s front
illuminated, the airbag is OFF. Also, when the Occu-
airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of
pant Classification System detects either an empty seat
the airbag. The passenger’s front airbag gas is vented
or a weight less than the predetermined threshold, the where the window bag inflates. This especially applies
ORC will not illuminate the PAD indicator light even to children. The window bag is only about 3-1/2
though the airbag is turned OFF. inches (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.
• Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located within • The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
2
the seat structure or between the seat tracks and the driver and the front passenger, and position every-
cushion frame. The weight sensors measure applied one for the best interaction with the front airbag.
weight and transfers that information to the OCM.
• The front passenger seat assembly contains critical
• The Side Impact SRS Window Bags are designed to components that affect the front passenger airbag
activate only in certain side collisions. When the ORC deployment. Correctly functioning front passenger
(with side impact option) detects a collision requiring seat components are critical for the Occupant Classifi-
the window bags to inflate, it signals the inflators on cation System (OCS) to properly classify the front
the crash side of the vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas passenger and calculate the proper airbag deploy-
is generated to inflate the window bag. The inflating ment. Do not make any modifications to the front
window bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner passenger seat components, assembly, or to the seat
out of the way and covers the window. The airbag cover. The following requirements must be strictly
forcefully inflates in about one quarter of the time it adhered to:
takes to blink your eye. Make sure you are seated and
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
belted properly and do not position items in the area
components in any way.
• Do not modify the front seat center console or center WARNING!

position seat in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
designated for the specific model being repaired. Al- the front passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
ways use the correct seat cover specified for the nents, or seat cover may inadvertently change the
vehicle. airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
• Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an acci-
cover. Do not add a secondary seat cover other than dent. A modified vehicle may not comply with
those approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.威 required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
• At no time should any supplemental restraint system (FMVSS).
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fas-
tener be modified or replaced with any part except If A Deployment Occurs
those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/ The airbag system is designed to deploy the airbags
Mopar威. when the impact sensors detect a moderate-to-severe
frontal collision, to help restrain the driver and front
passenger, and then immediately deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system. nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles 2
settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufac-
or all of the following may occur:
turer’s instructions for cleaning.
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. WARNING!
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
immediately. As the airbags deflate you may see some
belt retractor assembly, replaced by an authorized
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-
dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant
product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas
Classification System serviced as well.
used for airbag inflation. These airborne particles may
Maintaining Your Airbag System Enhanced Accident Response System

If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical
WARNING! system remains functional, vehicles equipped with
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when power door locks will unlock automatically. In addition,
you need it. You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect approximately 5 seconds after the vehicle has stopped
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind
of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper moving, the interior lights will light until the ignition
right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper,
vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards. switch is turned off.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system.
Airbag Light
The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for
any advanced airbag system service. If your seat including your trim
You will want to have the airbags ready to
cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way (including removal inflate for your protection in an impact. While
or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to
your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
may be used. If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
• Do not place or hang any items such as add-on video players on the an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
right front passenger seat back. The additional weight may cause
the Occupant Classification System to be unable to correctly classify • The airbag light does not come on or flickers during
the right front occupant. This could allow the passenger frontal
airbag to inflate when it is not desired. the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first
• You need proper knee impact protection in a collision. Do not mount turned on.
or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself. Be
sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
• The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second because the infant has a medical condition which
interval. makes it necessary for the driver to be able to see the
infant,
• The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving. • is a child, age 1 to 12 who must ride in the front seat
2
because there is no rear seat, because there is no rear
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer or any engine
seat position available, or because the child has a
related gauges are not working, the airbag control mod-
medical condition which makes it necessary for the
ule may also be disabled. The airbags may not be ready
driver to be able to see the child,
to inflate for your protection. Promptly check fuse block
for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on the inside of • has a medical condition which makes passenger airbag
the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses. See your inflation (deployment) a greater risk for the passenger
dealer if the fuse is good. than the risk of hitting the dashboard (instrument
panel) or windshield in a crash.
Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch – If Equipped
The passenger front airbag is to be turned off only if the
passenger:
• is an infant (less than 1 year old) who must ride in the
front seat because there is no rear seat, because the rear
seat is too small for a rear-facing infant restraint or
WARNING!
Whenever an airbag is turned off, even a lap/
shoulder belted passenger may hit their head, neck,
or chest on the dashboard (instrument panel) or
windshield in a crash. This may result in serious
injury or death.
NOTE: The Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch is not

available in the Quad Cab.
To Shut Off the Passenger Frontal Airbag Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an airbag deployment, your vehicle is
Place the ignition key in the Passenger Airbag On/Off
designed to record up to 2-seconds of specific vehicle
Switch, push the key in and turn clockwise, and remove
the key from the switch. This will shut off the passenger
data parameters (see list below) in an event data recorder 2
prior to the moment of airbag deployment. Please note
frontal airbag. The passenger frontal airbag symbol and
that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys,
the word “OFF” on the passenger airbag disable (PAD)
and are otherwise unavailable. In conjunction with other
lamp will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned
data gathered during a complete accident investigation,
to the ON position.
the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler
To Turn On the Passenger Frontal Airbag Corporation and others to learn more about the possible
causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to
Place the ignition key in the Passenger Airbag On/Off
assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition to
Switch, push the key in and turn counterclockwise, and
crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler Corpo-
remove the key from the switch. This will turn On the
ration, such investigations may be requested by custom-
passenger frontal airbag. The passenger airbag disable
ers, insurance carriers, government officials, and profes-
(PAD) lamp will now be Off when the ignition switch is
sional crash researchers, such as those associated with
turned to the ON position.
universities, and with hospital and insurance organiza-
tions.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by 1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
DaimlerChrysler Corporation (regardless of initiative), with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
the company or its designated representative will first provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for preserved
the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
DaimlerChrysler Corporation product
download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be 3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
4. Otherwise required by law
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
databases, such as those maintained by the US govern-
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status
ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, ve-
the airbag system
hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corpora- • Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)
tion to any third party except when:
• ⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
• Airbag deployment level (if applicable) rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, chil-
dren are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats
• Seatbelt status
rather than in the front.
• Brake status (service and parking brakes)
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
2
• Accelerator status (including vehicle speed) children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat
• Engine control status (including engine speed)
owner’s manual to ensure you have the right seat for
• Cruise control status your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child:
• Traction/stability control status Infants and Small Children
Child Restraint • Safety experts recommend that children ride
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
time - babies and children, too. Every state in the United one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
States and all Canadian provinces require that small of child restraints can be used rearward facing: infant
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, carriers and ⬙convertible⬙ child seats.
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. Children 12
years and under should ride properly buckled up in a
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the Older Children and Child Restraints
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
• Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). ⬙Convertible⬙ child seats can be
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and are
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
older than one year old. These child seats are also held
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
in the vehicle by the seatbelt or the LATCH child
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
restraint anchorage system. (See the LATCH - Child
held in the vehicle by the seatbelt or the LATCH child
Seat Anchorage System section.)
restraint anchorage system. (See the LATCH - Child
Seat Anchorage System section.) • The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weigh-
ing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag
cannot sit with knees bent over the seat cushion while
that does not have a switch to turn the airbag Off. An
the child’s back is against the seatback, they need a
airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and booster
to infants in this position.
seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
Children Too Large for Booster Seats WARNING!

• Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to • Improper installation can lead to failure of an
bend over the front of the seat when their back is infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a 2
against the seat back should use the lap/shoulder belt collision. The child could be badly injured or
in a rear seat. killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat. • A rearward facing infant restraint should only be
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug used in a rear seat of a vehicle that does not have
as possible. an airbag off switch. A rearward facing infant
restraint in the front seat may be struck by a
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or deploying passenger airbag which may cause se-
slouching can move the belt out of position. vere or fatal to the infant.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm.
For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org.
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child use a locking clip. If the seat belt has a cinching latch
restraint: plate, pulling up on the shoulder portion of the
lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
latch plate will keep the belt tight, however, any seat
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt
Standards. The manufacturer recommends that you
occasionally and pull it tight if necessary.
try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will
use it before you buy it. • Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the
manufacturer’s instructions tell you.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
weight and height limits. vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
and cause serious personal injury.
not work when you need it.
LATCH - Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
• The Club Cab first and Club/Quad Cab second row
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
outside seating positions have cinching latch plates.
Each vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
These are designed to keep the lap portion tight
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
provides for the installation of the child restraint without Club Cab
using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing the child
• The Club Cab front and rear right (if equipped with a
restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps
rear seat) passenger seating positions have lower
from the child restraint to the vehicle structure. LATCH-
anchorages for LATCH equipped child restraints.
2
compatible child restraint systems are now available.
However, because the lower anchorages are to be intro- Quad Cab
duced over a period of years, child restraint systems
• The Quad Cab second row seat has lower anchorages
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-
also have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
compatible child seats having flexible, webbing-
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
mounted lower attachments at all three seating posi-
connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail-
tions. Child seats with fixed lower attachments must
able for some time. For some older child restraints, many
be installed in the outboard positions only. Regardless
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
of the specific type of lower attachment, NEVER install
kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats
the available attachments provided with your child re-
share a common lower anchorage. If you are installing
straint in any vehicle.
LATCH-compatible child restraints in adjacent rear
seating positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or
the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard position, but

you must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the center
position.
If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible, you
can only install the child restraints using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Please refer to the next section for typical
installation instructions.
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint

System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system. The rear
seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at the rear
of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back, and are the back of the seat, being careful to route the tether strap
just visible when you lean into the vehicle to install the to provide the most direct path between the anchor and
child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your the child restraint. If your vehicle is equipped with
finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint 2
cushion surfaces. In addition, there are tether strap an- and, route the tether strap under the head restraint and
chorages each LATCH seating position (see section on between the two posts. Finally, tighten all three straps as
Child Restraint Tether Anchor). Many, but not all restraint you push the child restraint rearward and downward into
systems will be equipped with separate straps on each the seat, removing slack in the straps according to the
side, with each having a hook or connector for attachment child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the
tension in the strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and WARNING!
some rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap, a hook for attachment to the tether Improper installation of a child restraint to the
strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
the strap. You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of
the anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat cover material.
Then attach the tether strap to the anchorage located on
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat locking retractor seat belts, refer to ⬙Automatic Locking
Belt Mode⬙ earlier in this section. If you have trouble tighten-
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching the lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because
ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which are the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child opening on the restraint, follow these steps. If the buckle
restraint so that it should not be necessary to use a is webbing mounted, disconnect the latch plate from the
locking clip. If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt to shorten it.
pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release
belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will button facing out. If the belt still can’t be tightened, the
keep the belt tight; however, any seat belt system will buckle is not webbing mounted, or if by pulling and
loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
it tight if necessary. If the seat belt has an automatic to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
locking retractor, it will have a distinctive label. Pull the the buckle, turn the latch plate around, and insert the
belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you latch plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make
to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch the child restraint secure, try a different seating position
plate into the buckle. Then, pull the belt until it is all or use the locking clip provided with your child restraint.
extracted from the retractor. Allow the belt to return to See the section ⬙Child Restraint Tether Anchor⬙ to com-
the retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the plete the child seat installation.
lap portion about the child restraint. For automatic
Child Restraint Tether Anchor WARNING!

The Club Cab model has two routing straps
located behind each of the rear outboard seat- With a child restraint installed in the rear driver or
ing positions. The tether anchor itself is located passenger side locations, use care when adjusting 2
in the center of vehicle, in between the two the front seat(s) rearward, to avoid the front seat
seating positions. The front outboard passenger seating back coming in contact with the belted child directly
position is also equipped with a child tether anchorage, behind the seat. The child could be injured.
located at the base of the front seat back. When there is a
rear seat delete option, the tether anchorage located on
the cab back panel is designed to be used for the front WARNING!
seat center seating position. The Quad cab model has
three anchorages located behind each of the rear seating Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
positions (rear left, rear center, and rear right). or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be seriously injured or killed. Make
sure the child restraint tether strap is always routed
through the proper anchor strap inner loop.
Tether Strap at the Front Passenger Seat (Club Cab)

1. Route the child restraint tether strap up and over the
front passenger seat back and under the head restraint.
2. Connect the tether strap to the lower anchor.
3. Remove the slack in the tether strap so that it is pulled
tight.
Tether Straps at the Rear Passenger Seat (Club Cab)

1. Route the child restraint tether strap through the
routing loop, located directly behind the child restraint.
The routing loops are located behind the flip-down door
2
on the cab back panel (padded bolster).
2. Route the tether strap across to the center tether
anchorage. The center tether is located behind the slide
door in the center of the vehicle, between the two seating
positions.
3. Remove the slack in the tether strap so that the anchor
strap is pulled tight.
through the anchor strap outer loop (webbing material

loop), located directly behind the child restraint.
2. Route the tether strap across to the nearest installed
anchor strap, and attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor strap inner metal ring.
3. Remove the slack in the tether strap so that both
anchor straps are pulled tight.
NOTE: Two Anchors must be used for any of the three
seating positions.
Tether Straps at the Rear Passenger Seat (Quad Cab)

1. Route the child restraint tether strap under the head
restraint for the outboard seating positions, and then
Multiple Child Restraint Quad Cab

WARNING! ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to your new vehicle. Drive moderately during the first 300
seat failure and injury to the child. In a collision, the miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds
seat could come loose and allow the child to crash up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. While
into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers, or cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the limits
even be thrown from the vehicle. Use only the of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
anchor positions directly behind the child restraint
Avoid wide open throttle acceleration in low gear.
to secure a child restraint top tether strap. See your
dealer for help if necessary. The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality, energy-conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
Transporting Pets
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
shown in Section 7.
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. MUST NEVER BE USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few • It may be necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
thousand miles of operation. This is a normal part of the engine running for more than a short period. If so,
break-in and is not an indication of difficulty. adjust your climate control system to force outside air
into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed and the 2
SAFETY TIPS controls in any position except OFF or RECIRC.
Exhaust System • The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
WARNING! exhaust system.
Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an ex- Be aware of changes in the sound of the exhaust system;
tremely toxic gas that by itself is colorless and exhaust fumes detected inside the vehicle; or damage to
odorless. To avoid inhaling these gases, the follow- the underside or rear of the vehicle. Have a competent
ing precautions should be observed: mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adja-
cent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system
or out of the area. each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace or adjust as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The
Vehicle Vehicle:
Seat Belts Tires
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, Examine tires for tread wear or uneven wear patterns.
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced Check for stones, nails, glass or other objects lodged in
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. the tread.
Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check wheel
they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, nuts for tightness and tires for proper pressure.
etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or retractor
Lights
condition, replace the belt.
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights as
Defrosters you turn them on. Check turn signal and high beam
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place indicator lights on the instrument panel.
the blower control on high speed. You can feel the air
Door Latches
directed against the windshield.
Check for positive closing, latching and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check the area under vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, water, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected, the cause should be located and 2
corrected.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 ▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . .82 ▫ UConnect™ System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 ▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature — If ▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 UConnect™ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
▫ Electric Remote-Control Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . .83 䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 ▫ Manual Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
䡵 Hands–Free Communication (UConnect™) — If ▫ Front Seats Manual Seat Recliners . . . . . . . . . . 108
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment — If ▫ Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only) . . . . . 117
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints — Front Seating
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Cargo Light — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ 6 - Way Power Seat Adjuster — Driver’s Side
Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 䡵 Multifunction Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ Club Cab/Quad Cab Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 ▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 ▫ Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 ▫ High Beam / Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . 119
䡵 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 ▫ Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 ▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 䡵 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Headlamp Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . . 123
▫ Headlights, Parking Lights, Panel Lights . . . . . 116 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 ▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 ▫ Trip Odometer (ODO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 ▫ Elapsed Time (ET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 ▫ C/T Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
3
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 ▫ Compass/Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . 131
䡵 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 ▫ Automatic Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 ▫ Manual Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
䡵 Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer . . . . 127 ▫ To Put Into a Calibration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ US/M Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 ▫ Outside Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ Global Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 ▫ Programming Homelink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
▫ Step Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 ▫ Canadian Programming/Gate Programming . . 137
▫ Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO) . . . . . . . . 129 ▫ Using Homelink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
▫ Erasing Homelink Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 䡵 Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped . . . 142

▫ Reprogramming a Single Homelink Button . . . 138 䡵 Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 䡵 Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 䡵 Slide-In Campers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off ▫ Camper Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
(Battery Fed Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
䡵 Floor Console — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warning Vehicles Equipped
▫ Floor Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 With A Cap Or Slide-In Campers . . . . . . . . . . 145
MIRRORS Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the

small control under the mirror to the night position
Inside Day/Night Mirror
(toward rear of truck). The mirror should be adjusted
The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
through the rear window. A two-point pivot system
allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the
mirror.
3
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped

CAUTION!
This mirror will automatically adjust for annoying head-
light glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the
mirror. A light in the button will indicate when the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and
dimming feature is activated. wipe the mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
Folding exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved
either forward or rearward to resist damage.
Electric Remote-Control Mirrors

The controls for the power mirrors are located on the
driver’s door trim panel.
To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left

or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand
in the direction you want the mirror to move. When
finished adjusting the mirror, turn the control to the
center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror.
WARNING! HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —

IF EQUIPPED
Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in vehicle
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial
than they really are. Relying too much on your right a phone number with your cellular phone* using simple
side mirror could cause you to collide with another voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call ѧ Mike ѧWork⬙ or ⬙Dial ѧ
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when 248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is transmitted
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will
right side mirror. automatically mute your radio when using the UCon-
nect™ system.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
Heated mirrors are automatically activated when you phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
version 0.96 or higher.
depress the rear window defroster switch located on the
instrument panel. The light will illuminate to indicate For UConnect Customer Support call 1-877-855-8400 or
that the heating elements are ON. Turning OFF the visit the UConnect website (www.chrysler.com/uconnect).
ignition will deactivate the heated mirrors.
UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s micro-
phone for private conversation.
The UConnect™ phonebook enables you to store up to 32 access the system. The diagram below shows the mirror
names and four numbers per name. Each language has a with the appropriate buttons. Individual button behavior
separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that is discussed in the ⬙Operation⬙ section.
language. This system is driven through your Blue-
tooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect™
features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard 3
that enables different electronic devices to connect to
each other without wires or a docking station, so UCon-
nect works no matter where you stow your cellular
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as
your phone is turned on and has been paired to the
vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system.
Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped). UConnect™ Switches
The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the The UConnect™ system can be used with any Hands-
system and the control buttons that will enable you to Free Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. If your
cellular phone supports a different profile (eg., Headset
Profile), you may not be able to use any UConnect™ • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the the voice on beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt
phone manufacturer for details. or another prompt.
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the • For certain operations, compound commands can be
vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™ used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
system can either be adjusted from the radio volume ⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
(right switch), if so equipped.
• For each of the feature explanation in this section, only
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the combined form of the voice command is given.
the UConnect™ system such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on You can also break the commands into parts and say
certain radios. each part of the command, when you are asked for it.
For example, you can either use the combined form
Operation
voice command ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™
break the combined form command into two voice
system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu
commands: ⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please re-
structure. Voice commands are required after most
member, the UConnect™ system works best when you
UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a
talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to
specific command and then guided through the available
some one sitting eight feet away from you.
options.
Voice Command Tree Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone

Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section. To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone (re-
Help Command
fer to ⬙Introduction⬙ section to learn about the phone
If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to
type). To complete the pairing process, you will need to
know what your options are at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙
following the voice on beep. The UConnect™ system will
reference your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the 3
following vehicle specific websites may also provide
play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help.
detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone
To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply that you have:
press the ’Phone’ button and follow audible prompts for
NOTE:
directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
press of the ’Phone’ button on the mirror.
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the voice on beep, you can say • www.jeep.com/uconnect
⬙Cancel⬙ and you will be returned to the main menu.
The following are general phone to UConnect™ System
However, in a few instances the system will take you
pairing instructions:
back to the previous menu.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say • For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙ give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
• When prompted, after the voice on beep, say ⬙Pair a
given a unique phone name.
Phone.⬙
• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
• You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number which
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest
you will later need to enter into your cellular. You can
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
enter any four-digit pin number. You will not need to
your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,
remember this pin number after the initial pairing
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
process.
your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the
• The UConnect™ system will then prompt you to begin UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
the cellular phone pairing process on your cellular use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
phone. Before attempting to pair phone, please see same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
your cellular phone’s user manual (Bluetooth section) phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™
for instructions on how to complete this step. system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to ⬙Advanced Phone
Connectivity⬙ section).
Dial by Saying a Number Call by Saying a Name

• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin. • Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙ ⬙Call.⬙
• System will prompt you to say the number you want • System will prompt you to say the name of the person
3
call. you want call.
• For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901.⬙ The phone • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
number that you enter must be of valid length and the name of the person you want to call. For example,
combination. The UConnect™ limits the user from you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previ-
dialing invalid combination of numbers. For example, ously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phone-
234-567-890 is nine digits long, which is not a valid book. Refer to section ⬙Add Names to Your UCon-
phone number - the closest valid phone number has nect™ Phonebook,⬙ to learn how to store a name in the
ten digits. phonebook.
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone num- • The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and
ber and then dial. The number will appear in the then dial the corresponding phone number, which
display of certain radios. may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
when vehicle is not in motion.
main menu.
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say names in the phonebook with each name having up to
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙ four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
only in that language.
long names helps the voice recognition and is recom-
mended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or ⬙Robert⬙ Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.: when vehicle is not in motion.
⬙Home,⬙ ⬙Work,⬙ ⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
3
phonebook entry that you are editing.
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
return to the main menu. from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the ⬙Voice Recognition⬙ button
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired
number to a name entry that already exists in the
entry and say ⬙Delete.⬙
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s • After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will
work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ feature. ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile or pager. Say the designation you wish
to delete.
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be de- • The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
leted. Note that only the phonebook in the current phonebook entries.
language is deleted.
• To call one of the names in the list, press the ⬙Voice
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
name and say ⬙Call⬙. NOTE: the user can also exercise
⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙ operations at this point.
• The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
number designation you wish to call.
• The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you
• The selected number will be dialed.
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
Phone Call Features
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
The following features can be accessed through the
deleted.
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your
List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say your cellular service provider for the features that you
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙ have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call Making a Second Call while Current Call in
Currently in Progress Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or
system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the ⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
call. To reject the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the 3
until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
call was rejected. to section ⬙Toggling Between Two Calls.⬙ To combine two
calls, refer to section ⬙Conference Call.⬙
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold
If a call is currently in progress and you have another To put a call on hold, press the ⬘Phone’ button until you
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for hear a single beep which will indicate that the call has
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell been placed on hold. To bring the call back from hold,
phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call press and hold the ⬘Phone’ button until you hear a single
on hold and answer the incoming call. NOTE: The beep.
UConnect™ system compatible phones in market today
do not support rejecting an incoming call when another
call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only either
answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Toggling Between Calls established, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep been joined into one conference call.
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
Call Termination
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the ⬘Phone’
time.
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
Conference Call there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
Redial
hold), press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been • Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling ⬙Redial.⬙
To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recogni-
• The UConnect™ system will call the last number that
tion’ button while a call is in progress and make a second
was dialed on your cellular phone. Note: this may not
phone call as described in section ⬙Making a Second Call
be the last number dialed from the UConnect™ sys-
while Current Call in Progress.⬙ After the second call has
tem.
Call Continuation UConnect™ System Features

Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
Language Selection
UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
been switched to off. Call continuation functionality
using,
available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
• After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin. 3
on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the name of the language you wish to switch to
the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the (English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
call to the mobile phone.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
• After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue language selection.
on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
which the call is automatically transferred from the
voice commands will be in that language.
UConnect™ system to the mobile phone.
NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change op-
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
eration, only the language specific 32 name phonebook is
mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
usable. The phone pairing is not language specific and
usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance The UConnect™ system does slightly lower your chances
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell
reachable: phone directly.
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UCon-
number for your area. nect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature in
emergency situations when the cell phone has network
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system
coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™ system.
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows: Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance,
⬙Emergency⬙ and the UConnect™ system will instruct • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num- ⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
ber. This feature is only supported in the USA.
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-
Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA/ 528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number called may not for Mexico city and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
be applicable with the available cellular service and area. city in Mexico).
Please refer to the 24-Hour Towing Assistance coverage You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voice-
details in the DaimlerChrysler Corporation 24-Hour mail system or an automated service, such as, paging
Towing Assistance Program Guide. service or automated customer service. Some services
require immediate response selection, in some instances,
Paging
that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system.
To learn how to page, refer to section ⬙Working with
Automated Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for When calling a number with your UConnect™ system
3
pagers of certain companies which time-out a little too that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
soon to work properly with the UConnect™ system. sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push
the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you
Voice Mail Calling
wish to enter followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example,
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to section
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
⬙Working with Automated Systems.⬙
pound 3 7 4 6 #, you can press the ’Voice Recognition’
Working with Automated Systems button and say ⬙3 7 4 6 # Send.⬙ Saying a number, or
This method is designed to be used in instances where sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send⬙ is also to be
one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone used to navigate through an automated customer service
keypad while navigating through an automated tele- center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.
phony system.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts Phone and Network Status Indicators

The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you The UConnect™ system will provide notification to
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice inform you if your cellular phone is in roaming status,
recognition command immediately. For example, if a has low signal strength, or has a low battery when you
prompt is playing ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear are trying to place a phone call.
aѧ,⬙ you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without having to
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
from confirming your choices (e.g. the UConnect™ sys- dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it). phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the
same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The UConnect™ system will
dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
will be given the choice to change it.
situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the Information Service
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone
hear the audio. number ⬙#121,⬙ you can access voice activated automated
system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc.
Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)
related information.
When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other Advanced Phone Connectivity
3
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
order to mute the UConnect™ system:
The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be
• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button. transferred to your cellular phone to the UConnect™
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongo-
ing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to
⬙Mute.⬙
the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the ’Voice
In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system: Recognition’ button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button. Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
⬙Mute-off.⬙
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue- Select another Cellular Phone
tooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired cellular This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone and the UConnect™ system, follow the instruction phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must
described in your cellular phone user’s manual. have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system
that you want to use it with.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone.⬙
“Setup Phone pairing”.
• The phone names (along with priority numbers) will
• When prompted, say ⬙List Phones⬙.
be played.
• The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of
• When prompted say the priority number of the cellu-
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
lar phone you wish to select. You can also press the
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
⬘Voice Recognition’ button anytime while the list is
phone being announced, press the ⬘Voice recognition’
being played and say the priority number.
button and say “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see next two
sections for alternate way of doing this.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™
call. If the selected phone is not available, the UCon- System
nect™ system will return to using the highest priority
Voice Recognition (VR)
phone present in or near (approximately with in 30
feet) the vehicle. • Always wait for the beep before speaking.
Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones • Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
3
speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
away from you.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
during a voice recognition period.
• At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete.⬙
• Performance is maximized under:
• The phone names (along with priority numbers) will
• low-to-medium blower setting,
be played.
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• When prompted say the priority number of the cellu-
lar phone (or “All” to delete all phones) you wish to • low road noise,
delete. You can also press the ⬘Voice Recognition’
button anytime while the list is being played and say • smooth road surface,
the priority number.
• fully closed windows, • You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
• dry weather condition.
• Even though international dialing for most number
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
in North American English and Spanish accents, the
number combinations may not be supported.
system may not always work for some.
Far End Audio Performance
• When navigating through an automated system, such
as, voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of • Audio quality is maximized under:
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙send.⬙
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
motion is recommended.
• low road noise,
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect™ phonebook. • smooth road surface,
• UConnect™ phonebook name tag recognition rate is • fully closed windows, and
optimized for the person who stored the name in the
• dry weather condition.
phonebook.
• Operation from driver seat.
• Performance, such as, audio clarity, echo. and loud- Reset

ness to a large degree, rely on the phone and network, In rare instances, it may be necessary to reset the UCon-
and not the UConnect™ system. nect™ system. The reset feature is exercised by pressing
and holding the ’UConnect™ ’ and ’Voice Recognition’
• Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
buttons simultaneously for 15 seconds. Normally, you do
the in-vehicle audio volume.
not need to exercise this feature. 3
Bluetooth Communication Link
Power-Up
Cellular phones have been found to occasionally loose
After switching ignition key from off to either On or ACC
connection to the UConnect™ system. When this hap-
position, or after a reset, you must wait at least five (5)
pens, the connection can generally be re-established by
seconds prior to using the system.
switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recom-
mended to remain in Bluetooth ⬙on⬙ mode.
3
North American English SEATS

Primary Alternate(s) Manual Seat Adjustment
Zero Oh The adjusting lever is at the front of the seat, near the
Add location Add new floor. Lift the lever and move the seat to the desired
position. Release the bar to lock the seat into position.
All All of them 3
Confirmation prompts Confirmations prompts Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
Delete a name Delete seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
Language Select language
List names List all
List paired phones List phones
Pager Beeper
Phone pairing Pairing
Phonebook Phone book
Return to main menu Return. Main menu
Select phone select
Set up Phone settings phone set
up
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Front Seats Manual Seat Recliners

The front seats are equipped with recliners. The reclining
mechanism is operated by a lever located on the right
side of the passenger’s seat and the left side of the
driver’s seat. To recline, lean forward slightly before
lifting the lever, then push back to the desired position
and release the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to
return the seatback to its normal position. Using body
pressure, lean forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure the seatback is locked.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner 3
only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment — If

Equipped
The manual lumbar support rotary control adjustment is
located on the left side of the driver’s seat. Rotate the
Adjustable Head Restraints — Front Seating
knob to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar
Positions
support.
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down
on the restraints so that the upper edge is as high as
practical, at least to the level of the ears.
To lower the head restraint, depress the release button

located at the base of the head restraint and push down
on the head restraint.
6 - Way Power Seat Adjuster — Driver’s Side Only

The 6-way power seat adjuster switches are on the
outboard side of the driver’s seat. Use this switch to
move the seat up or down, forward or rearward, or tilt. Power Seat Control Location
control seat height. Change the seat angle by using the

two toggle switches, tilting it up or down.
Up, Down, Forward, and Rearward

The power seat controls are on the outboard side of the
driver’s seat cushion. Three switches control the seat Tilt Adjustment
movement. The four-way switch in the center can be
moved forward or backwards to get the most comfortable
position. The same switch can be moved up and down to
Club Cab/Quad Cab Rear Seat TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
More cargo space is available by lifting up on the rear To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull
seat cushion. the hood release lever located under the left side of the
The Quad Cab rear seat is a 60/40 split cushion and full instrument panel.
back. Either cushion can be raised independently.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
The heated seat switches are located at the front of the
floor console. The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
Each heated seat switch has two settings (HI and LOW).
Press the switch once to obtain the desired heating
position and press a second time in the same direction to
turn the heated seats OFF. If you do not purposefully
turn the switch OFF, the heating element in the seat will
remain activated until the ignition is turned off. The
indicators on the switch will illuminate when the heated Hood Release Lever Location
seats are in the (HI or LOW) position. Flashing telltale
lights on the switch indicate that the Heated Seat system
needs servicing.
Then push the safety latch lever down while lifting the To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
grille with your right hand. It is located at the top center close it. Use a firm downward push at the center front
of the grille just left of center. edge of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed,
Lift the hood and gas filled props will hold it open.
with both latches engaged.
3
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before
driving.
Secondary Latch Location (Push Down)

LIGHTS Interior Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front

doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the right side of the switch) is rotated to the
second upward detent position, or if equipped, when the
UNLOCK button is pressed on the key fob.When a door
is open and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer
control all the way down to the OFF detent will cause all Battery Saver
the interior lights to go out. This is also known as the To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, Load Shed-
⬙Party⬙ mode because it allows the doors to stay open for ding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
extended periods of time without discharging the vehi-
If the ignition is off and any door is left ajar for 15
cle’s battery.
minutes or the dimmer control is rotated upwards for 15
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.
3
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
If the headlamps remain on while the ignition is cycled
down (dimmer). When the headlights are ON you can
off, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after 8
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odom-
minutes. If the headlamps are turned on and left on for 8
eter, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
minutes while the ignition is off, the exterior lights will
up until you hear a click. This feature is termed the
automatically turn off.
“Parade” mode and is useful when headlights are re-
quired during the day. NOTE: Battery Saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
Club Cab/Quad Cab models may have an optional
switched dome lamp that may be operated by pressing
the lens.
Headlamp Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlamp delay that will leave the headlamps on for 60
seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is
turned OFF while the headlamp switch is on, and then
the headlamp switch is cycled off. The headlamps will
remain on for 60 seconds. Headlamp delay can be
cancelled by either turning the headlamp switch ON then
OFF or by turning the ignition ON.
Headlights, Parking Lights, Panel Lights
When the headlight switch is rotated to the first
position, the parking lights, taillights, side marker
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight lenses
lights, license plate light and instrument panel
that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
lights are all turned on. The headlights will turn ON
than glass headlights.
when the switch is rotated to the second position.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and Lights-on Reminder

reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To If the headlights, parking lights, courtesy lights or cargo
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol- lights are left on, after the ignition is turned off, a chime
lowed by rinsing. will sound when the driver’s door is opened.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel Fog Lights — If Equipped
wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses. The foglights are turned ON by placing the head-
3
light rotary control in the parking light or head-
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only)
light position and pushing in the headlight rotary
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
control. The fog lights will operate only when the parking
engine is started. This provides a constant ⬙Lights ON⬙
lights are ON or when the vehicle headlights are ON low
condition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights
beam. An indicator light located in the instrument cluster
illuminate at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the
will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights
parking brake is applied the Daytime Running Lights
will turn off when the switch is pulled out, when the
will turn off.
headlight switch is rotated to the OFF position, or the
high beam is selected.
CARGO Light — If Equipped MULTIFUNCTION CONTROL LEVER

The multifunction control lever is located on the left side
of the steering column.
Turn Signals
The cargo lights are turned on by pressing on the

CARGO button. The interior lights will also turn on
when the cargo lights are on. The cargo lights will also
turn on for 30 seconds when a key fob Unlock is pressed,
Move the lever up or down to signal a right-hand or
as part of the illuminated entry feature.
left-hand turn.
The arrow on either side of the instrument cluster flashes High Beam / Low Beam Select Switch
to indicate the direction of the turn, and proper operation Pull the multifunction control lever fully toward the
of the front and rear turn signal lights. If an indicator fails steering wheel to switch the headlights from HIGH or
to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that LOW beam.
the switch or indicator lamp is defective.
If a defective bulb or wiring circuit is detected for the
3
turn signal system, the arrow indicators will flash at a
faster rate.
You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down.
NOTE: If a turn signal has been left on for at least a mile
duration, a continuous chime will sound.
Passing Light
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
Windshield Wipers Intermittent Wiper System

The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For
maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
into the upper end of the delay range.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
it enters the LO continual speed position. The delay can
be regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every 2 seconds. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km) or less.
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the
multifunction control lever. Turn the end of the handle to
select the desired wiper speed.
WARNING! Windshield Washers

To use the washer, push in on the washer knob on the end
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield of the multifunction control lever and hold while spray is
could lead to an accident. You might not see other desired. If the washer knob is depressed while in the
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of delay range, the wiper will operate for several seconds
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the after the washer knob is released. It will then resume the 3
windshield with defroster before and during wind- intermittent interval previously selected. If the washer
shield washer use. knob is pushed, for a period greater than 1 second, while
in the OFF position, the wiper will wipe approximately
three wipes, after the wash knob is released.
NOTE: If the front wiper is operating when the ignition
is turned off, the wiper will automatically return to the To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
⬙Park⬙ position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wipers in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
will resume operation. exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
TILT STEERING COLUMN WARNING!

To tilt the column, push down on the lever below the turn
signal control and move the wheel up or down, as Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
desired. moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-
umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-
hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED To Activate

When engaged, this device takes over accelerator opera- Push the ON/OFF button to the ON position. In the
tion at speeds greater than (refer to the table below for instrument cluster, the word “CRUISE” illuminates when
the speed for your specific engine). The controls are the system is on.
mounted on the steering wheel.
To Set At A Desired Speed
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
3
and release the SET button. Release the accelerator and
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, normal braking, or pressing
the CANCEL button will deactivate speed control with-
out erasing the memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button to
the OFF position or turning off the ignition erases the
memory.
WARNING! Tapping the ACCEL button once will result in a speed

increase (refer to the table below for the speed for your
Leaving the Speed Control ON when not in use is specific engine). Each time the button is tapped, speed
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system to increases so that tapping the button three times will
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose increase speed by three increments.
control and have an accident. Always leave the Tapping the DECEL button once will result in a speed
system OFF when you aren’t using it. decrease (refer to the table below for the speed for your
specific engine). Each time the button is tapped, speed
To Resume Speed will decrease. For example, tapping the button 3 times
To resume a previously set speed, push and release the will decrease the speed by 3 times the speed listed in the
RESUME button. Resume can be used at any speed above table below (refer to the table below for the speed for
(refer to the table below for the speed for your specific your specific engine).
engine).
To decrease speed while the speed control is on, press
To Vary The Speed Setting and hold the DECEL button. Release the button when the
When the speed control is on, speed can be increased by desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.
pressing and holding the ACCEL button. When the
button is released, a new set speed will be established.
Functions 3.7L 4.7L 4.7L HO

Engage Speed 30 mph (48 km/h) 30 mph (48 km/h) 30 mph (48 km/h)
Minimun RESUME Speed 25 mph (40 km/h) 25 mph (40 km/h) 25 mph (40 km/h)
ACCEL Increase 2 mph (3km/h) 2 mph (3km/h) 2 mph (3 km/h)
DECEL Decrease 1 mph (2 km/h) 1 mph (2 km/h) 1 mph (2 km/h) 3
Dropout Speed 25 mph (40 km/h) 25 mph (40 km/h) 25 mph (40 km/h)
To Accelerate For Passing Vehicles equipped with a Automatic transmission may
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the exhibit several downshifts under the above conditions.
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. To reduce the frequency of the downshifts and to im-
prove vehicle performance, it is advisable to lock out
NOTE: When driving uphill, at elevations above 2,000
overdrive by pressing the “TOW/HAUL” button located
feet (610 meters), or when the vehicle is heavily loaded
at the end of the gear shifter.
(especially when towing) the vehicle may slow below the
SET speed. If the vehicle speed drops below (refer to the
table below for the speed for your specific engine), the
speed control will automatically disengage. If this hap-
pens, you can push down on the accelerator pedal to
maintain the desired speed.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console has the following features:
• Courtesy Lights
• Garage Door Opener — If Equipped
• Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer — If
Equipped
Courtesy/Reading Lights COMPASS/TEMPERATURE MINI-TRIP COMPUTER

Near the front of the console are two courtesy/reading This feature allows you to choose between a compass/
lights. temperature display and one of four trip conditions being
monitored.
Both lights illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is
opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the US/M Button
courtesy light position (fully upward position), or when Use this button to change the display from U.S. to metric
3
the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless measurement units.
Entry transmitter, if so equipped. These lights are also
operated individually as reading lights by pressing the
recessed area of the corresponding lens.
NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the vehicle is turned OFF, they will
extinguish after 8 minutes.
RESET Button Global Reset

If the RESET button and STEP button are pressed at the
same time and held for 3 seconds the Global Reset feature
will reset the distance to empty (using a default fuel
economy value), fuel economy, trip odometer, and
elapsed time displays.
Use this button to reset the following displays to zero:

• Average Fuel Economy
• Trip Odometer
• Elapsed time.
Step Button Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO)

Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. This
display mode becomes less sensitive to instantaneous
changes in fuel consumption as the number of total
vehicle miles since the last reset increases. It is suggested
that this mode be reset periodically for general operation 3
or when driving conditions change significantly (for
example, at the end of a trip or when a trailer is
connected or disconnected).
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. The estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
Use this button to choose or cycle through the four trip
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
conditions.
tank level.
When Distance To Empty = 0, the fuel gauge pointer will Elapsed Time (ET)
initially be on the red “E” marker. At this point (fuel This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time
gauge pointer on the the red “E” marker) there is reserve since the last reset.
fuel capacity, which corresponds to approximately 8% of
C/T Button
tank volume. This reserve capacity was put in place to
prevent the likelihood of customers running out of fuel
when operating at maximum load conditions in areas
where there aren’t many gas stations.
NOTE: The Distance To Empty will remain equal to
zero, until the vehicle runs out of fuel or is refueled.
Trip Odometer (ODO)
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset.
Use this button to select a readout of the outside tem-

perature and one of eight compass headings that indicate
the direction in which the vehicle is facing.
Compass/Temperature Display After completing one 360° turn, with the vehicle traveling
less than 5 mph (8 km/h), in an area free from large metal
WARNING! or metallic objects, the CAL symbol will turn off and the
compass will function normally.
Even if the display still reads a few degrees above Manual Compass Calibration
32°F ( 0°C), the road surface may be icy, particularly 3
in woods or on bridges. Drive carefully under such NOTE: To ensure proper compass calibration, make
conditions to prevent an accident and possible per- sure the compass variance is properly set before manu-
sonal injury or property damage. ally calibrating the compass.
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL symbol does
Automatic Compass Calibration not appear, you must manually put the compass into the
This compass is self-calibrating which eliminates the “Calibration” mode.
need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the CAL
symbol will be displayed.
To Put Into a Calibration Mode

Turn on the ignition and set the display to “Compass/
Temperature.” Press and hold the RESET button to
change the display between VAR (compass variance) and
CAL (compass calibration) modes. When the CAL sym-
bol is displayed complete one 360 degree turn in an area
free from large metal objects or power lines. The CAL
symbol will turn off and the compass will function
normally.
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
north and geographic north. In some areas of the country,
the difference between magnetic and geographic north is
great enough to cause the compass to give false readings.
If this occurs, the compass variance must be set according
to the Compass Variance Map.
To set the variance: Turn the ignition ON and set the GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
display to “Compass/Temperature.” Press and hold the The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver replaces up to
RESET button approximately five seconds. The last vari- three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that operate
ance zone number will be displayed. Press the STEP devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, or
button to select the new variance zone and press the home lighting. It triggers these devices at the push of a
RESET button to resume normal operation. button. The Universal Transceiver operates off your vehi- 3
cle’s battery and charging system; no batteries are needed.
Outside Temperature
Because the ambient temperature sensor is located un-
derhood, engine temperature can influence the displayed
temperature, therefore, temperature readings are slowly
updated when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (30
km/h) or during stop and go driving.
For additional information on HomeLink威, call 1–800– Programming HomeLink

355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, it is
advised to park outside the garage. It is also recom-
WARNING! mended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to
A moving garage door can cause injury to people and
HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmis-
pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be
sion of the radio-frequency signal.
seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and 1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons, and
reverse” feature as required by federal safety stan- release only when the indicator light begins to flash (after
dards. This includes most garage door opener mod- 20 seconds). Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30
els manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage seconds and do not repeat step one to program a second
door opener without these safety features it could and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two
cause injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 HomeLink buttons.
or, on the Internet at www.homelink.com for safety
information or assistance.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can 3
cause serious injury or death to people and pets or
damage to objects.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3

inches (3-8 cm) away from the HomeLink buttons while
keeping the indicator light in view.
WARNING!
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger- button that you want to train and the hand-held trans-
ous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while mitter buttons. Do not release the buttons until step 4
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri- has been completed.
ous injury or death.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and
may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with then turns to a constant light, continue with ⴖProgram-
procedures noted in the ⬙Gate Operator/Canadian Pro- mingⴖ steps 6-8 to complete the programming of a rolling
gramming⬙ section. code equipped device (most commonly a garage door
opener).
4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink successfully receives the 6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit)
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release in the garage, locate the ⬙learn⬙ or ⬙smart⬙ button. This
both buttons after the indicator light changes from the can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
slow to the rapid flash. attached to the motor-head unit.
5. Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and 7. Firmly press and release the ⬙learn⬙ or ⬙smart⬙ button.
observe the indicator light. If the indicator light stays on (The name and color of the button may vary by manu-
constantly, programming is complete and your device facturer.)
should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step
and released.
eight.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink but-
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two
tons, begin with ⬙Programming⬙ step two. Do not repeat
seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button.
step one.
Repeat the ⴖpress/hold/releaseⴖ sequence a second time,
and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties
(or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this programming a gate operator by using the ⬙Program-
sequence a third time to complete the programming. ming⬙ procedures (regardless of where you live), replace
ⴖProgramming HomeLinkⴖ step 3 with the following:
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code
equipped device. NOTE: If programming a garage door opener or gate
operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the
3
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink but-
⬙cycling⬙ process to prevent possible overheating.
tons, begin with ⬙Programming⬙ step two. Do not repeat
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button
step one. For questions or comments, please contact
while you press and release every two seconds (⬙cycle⬙)
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming successfully been accepted by HomeLink. (The indicator
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig- light will flash slowly and then rapidly.) Proceed with
nals to ⬙time-out⬙ (or quit) after several seconds of ⬙Programming⬙ step four to complete.
transmission which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to ⬙time-out⬙ in the same manner.
Using HomeLink seconds. HomeLink is now in the train (or learning)

To operate, simply press and release the programmed mode and can be programmed at any time beginning
HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the with ⬙Programming⬙ - step 2.
trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink
etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
button previously trained, follow these steps:
device may also be used at any time. In the event that
there are still programming difficulties or questions, 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do
contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-355- NOT release the button.
3515.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds.
Erasing HomeLink Buttons Without releasing the HomeLink button, proceed with
To erase programming from the three buttons (individual ⬙Programming⬙ step 2
buttons cannot be erased but can be ⬙reprogrammed⬙ -
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at:
note below), follow the step noted:
www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
• Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash-after 20 seconds.
Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer that 30
Security • This device must accept any interference that may be

received including interference that may cause undes-
Garage Door Opener Operation with Security
ired operation.
Alarm (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the Security Alarm NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
feature, the operation of the HomeLink feature will be proved by the party responsible for compliance could
purposely inhibited if the Security Alarm is ⬙Armed⬙. void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
3
This prevents HomeLink operation due to un-authorized
HomeLink威 is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,
vehicle entry. HomeLink operation will be re-stored
Inc.
when the Security Alarm has been ⬙Disarmed⬙.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies. ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
This vehicle has two 12V auxiliary power outlets that can
To erase all of the previously trained frequencies, hold provide up to 20 Amps of current for accessories de-
down both outside buttons until the green light begins to signed for use with standard power outlet adapters. The
flash. outlets are located in the instrument panel, below the
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with temperature control setting knob, and the other inside the
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the full - size center console. As a safety precaution, the outlet
following conditions: in the instrument panel only operates with the ignition
switch ON. When the optional Cigar Lighter heating
• This device may not cause harmful interference. element is used, it heats when pushed in and pops out
automatically when ready for use. To preserve the heat- Electrical Outlet Use With Engine OFF (Battery
ing element, do not hold the lighter in the heating Fed Configuration)
position.
The console outlet can be reconfigured by the customer to CAUTION!
operate only when the ignition is On (switch battery fed)
or with the ignition switch On/Off (battery fed) to allow • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
for cellular phone charging and/or operation while the from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
ignition is Off.
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
NOTE: All accessories connected to these outlets should ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent engine
starting.
be removed or turned OFF when the vehicle is not in use
to protect the battery against discharge (unless the cus- • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
tomer has reconfigured the fuse block to switched battery
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
feed). tently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
FLOOR CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED • Coin slots

Floor Console Features The coin slots are located under the instrument panel
center stack.
Floor Console Features
Storage Compartments
The Floor Console between the driver’s and front pas-
senger’s seat, has the following features:
Some miscellaneous storage compartments and cup 3
holders have rubber mats at the bottom, the mats are
• Miscellaneous storage compartments both removable and dishwasher safe for cleaning pur-
poses. Various storage compartments provide versatile
• Flexible cup holder inserts
and useful storage. A coin holder is also provided inside
• Portable phone storage bin the console storage compartment.
• Portable phone cord routing between lid and base on Cup Holders
forward edge The cup holders fit a wide variety of cup and bottle sizes.
To use the adjustable cup holders (only in automatic
• 12 Volt battery fed power outlet inside storage com-
transmission vehicles) place your beverage in the cup
partment
holder well, then adjust the movable arms to tightly hold
• Side open armrest lid the beverage.
• Tissue holder & pen holder
Power Outlet and Portable Phone Storage the armrest lid. A tissue holder is also provided on the
The console is equipped with a power outlet, portable inside of the armrest lid, which holds a pocket size soft
phone storage bin, and phone cord routing. The phone pack of tissue.
storage bin can be used when ease access to the phone is
needed. Also the power outlet inside console compart- CENTER STORAGE COMPARTMENT — IF
ment can be used to power up the phone while it is being EQUIPPED
stored in the bin. To use plug in the portable power The center portion of the seat folds down to provide an
recharge cord and place the cord along the slot provided armrest with unique storage compartments under the lid.
in the left side of the console. Close the console armrest Push the button on the armrest to raise the lid. Compart-
lid and plug the power cord into the phone while resting ments include a holder which will accommodate five
the phone in the bin. The power outlet may be used for compact disks with finger notches for easier access, a
any portable item with a standard 12 volt power plug. pencil tray, a coin holder, and a large open area for
miscellaneous items.
Side Open Armrest Lid
Pressing the button on the left side of the console opens
the console armrest lid. The armrest lid will remain open
until armrest lid is closed manually by pressing the lid
back into place. A penholder is provided on the inside of
CUP HOLDERS
If your vehicle has bucket seats with a center console,
there are three cup holders located on the console. Refer
to the section on floor console.
A two-cavity cup holder is available on all Quad Cab
with rear seats mounted on the floor.
3
Rear Cup Holders – Quad Cab with Automatic

TAILGATE
To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an overhang,
the tailgate can be removed quickly. Follow these steps:
1. Open the tailgate to a 45° angle.
Front Cup Holders – Quad Cab with Automatic

2. Unclip and remove the cables from the box while To reinstall the tailgate, do the following:
maintaining a 45° angle.
1. Slide the tailgate onto the driver’s side pivot.
2. Hold the tailgate at a 45° angle and insert it into the
passenger side pivot.
3. Clip the cables to the box.
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS
Camper Applications
Certain truck models are not recommended for slide-in
campers. To determine if your vehicle is excluded, please
refer to the Consumer Information Truck-Camper Load-
ing document located in your Owner’s Manual packet or
3. Lift the tailgate off of the pivot on the passenger side available from your dealer. For safety reasons, follow all
by pulling upward and rearward at the same time. instructions on this important document.
4. Slide the tailgate to the passenger side while making

sure clearance from the box and taillight is maintained.
General Information Carbon Monoxide Warning Vehicles Equipped

The Manufacturer’s Warranty does not apply to body With A Cap or Slide-In Campers
modifications and special equipment, such as a camper To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly, the
unit, heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc., supplied by exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap or
manufacturers other than the manufacturer. For warranty Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the overhang-
coverage and service on these items, contact the appli- ing camper compartment and be free of leaks. 3
cable manufacturer.
To mount a camper unit with an overhang, the tailgate
can be removed. Unlatch tailgate and remove support
cables from the retainer pins. Raise right side of tailgate
until the lower right side pivot clears the hanger bracket.
Then slide the tailgate to the right to remove.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
CONTENTS
䡵 Instruments And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 䡵 Sales Code REF — AM/FM/CD (Single Disc)
Radio With Optional Hands Free Phone 4
䡵 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
䡵 Instrument Cluster Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 161
䡵 Radio Reception Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
▫ Operation Instructions - CD Mode . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
▫ Operating Instructions - Hands Free
▫ FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
䡵 Electronic Digital Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
148 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
䡵 Sales Code RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-Disc) Radio ▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
With Optional Satellite Radio, Hands Free Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Phone, And Video Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In REF Radios . . . . . . 180
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 166
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In RAQ Radios . . . . . 180
▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For
▫ Selecting a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
CD Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
▫ Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels . . . . . . 181
▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For
CD Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 ▫ Using The PTY (Program Type) Button
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
▫ PTY Button ⬙Scan⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For
MP3 Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 ▫ PTY Button ⬙Seek⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . 176 ▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
䡵 Satellite Radio — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 ▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 149
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls — If Equipped . . 182 䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 ▫ Air Conditioning And Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 ▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
䡵 Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 ▫ Operation Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . . 184 䡵 Rear Window Defroster – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 191
4
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION

CAUTION!
1. Fuel Gage
The fuel gauge shows level of fuel in tank when Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the
ignition switch is in the ON position. (See page 245 engine running as you would not be able to react to
for more information.) the temperature indicator if the engine overheats.
2. Temperature Gage
The temperature gage indicates engine coolant The gage pointer will remain near its last reading when
temperature. Any reading within the normal the engine is turned off. It will return to a true reading
range indicates that the cooling system is operat- when the engine is restarted.
ing satisfactorily. The gage needle in V6 and V8 engines 3. Turn Signal Indicators
will likely indicate a high temperature when driving in When a turn signal is activated, a right-pointing or
hot weather, up mountain grades, in heavy traffic, or left-pointing arrow lights up and flashes to indicate the
when towing a trailer. If the needle rises to the “H” mark, direction of the turn. These indicators also indicate
stop the vehicle, shift into N (Neutral) increase engine proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
speed for 2-3 minutes. If the temperature reading does If either indicator flashes at a faster rate than normal,
not return to normal, seek authorized service immedi- check for a defective bulb. If either indicator fails to light
ately. up when the lever is moved, check for a defective fuse or
turn signal LED. A single chime is activated when the
left/right turn signal is left on with the engine RPM 7. Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
vehicle speed greater than 15 mph (24 km/h) for more This light shows when the fog lights are ON.
than one mile. (See page 118 for more information.)
4. Low Fuel Warning Light 8. Coolant Temperature Light
This indicator lights when the fuel gauge reads 1/8 This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
of a tank or less. There is a pointer on the side of tion. For a bulb check, this light will come on
this symbol that indicates the side that your fuel momentarily when the ignition is turned On. If the 4
filler door is located. light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle, shift into N
(Neutral) and increase the engine speed for 2 to 3
5. High Beam Indicator
minutes. If the temperature reading does not return to
Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
normal, seek authorized service immediately.
6. Seat Belt Reminder Light

This light comes on for several seconds after the
ignition is turned ON as a reminder to “buckle
up.” This light will remain on as long as the seat
belt remains unbuckled. If this light flashes, it indicates a
fault in the airbag system. Have the system checked by
an authorized dealer. (See page 32 for more information.)
9. Speedometer
CAUTION!
Shows the vehicles speed.
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could 10. Voltage Light
damage your vehicle. If the temperature light is on, This light monitors the electrical system voltage.
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle The light should turn on momentarily as the
in neutral with the air conditioner turned off until engine is started. If the light stays on or turns on while
the light turns off. If the if the light remains on, turn driving, it indicates a problem with the charging system.
the engine off immediately, and call for service. Immediate service should be obtained.
11. Security Light
This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds
WARNING!
when the vehicle theft alarm is arming. The light will
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set.
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling The security light will also come on for about three
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your seconds when the ignition is first turned on.
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7 of this manual. Follow
the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure
Cap paragraph.
12. ABS Warning Light 14. Tachometer

This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System This gage measures engine revolutions-per-minute (rpm
which is described elsewhere in this manual. x 1000).
This light will come on when the ignition key is
15. Gear Selector
turned to the ON position and may stay on for
The electronic gear selector display is self-contained
approximately 3 seconds. If this light remains on or
within the instrument cluster. It displays the position of
comes on during driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock
the automatic transmission shift lever, and the relation of 4
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
each position to all other positions. For a good signal the
service is required. See your authorized dealer immedi-
display will place a box around the selected transmission
ately.
range (PRND21). If the PRNDL displays only the char-
13. Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Light acters PRND21 (no boxes) have the system checked by an
This light indicates that the engine oil pressure has authorized dealer.
become too low. For a bulb check, this light will
16. Odometer
come on momentarily when the ignition is turned On. If
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut
been driven.
off the engine as soon as possible. Immediate service
should be obtained. (See page 298 for more information.)
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odom-
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the eter reset button to turn the GASCAP message off. If the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. There- problem continues, the message will appear the next time
fore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or the vehicle is started.
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
18. Transmission Temperature Indicator
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
This light indicates that there is excessive transmission
be determined.
fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage
17. Trip Odometer such as trailer towing. If this light comes on, stop the
The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. To vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster, with the
toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer, transmission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off.
press the Odometer/Trip Odometer Button. To reset the
19. Does not Apply
Trip Odometer, press and hold the button while in trip
This indicator is not available.
mode, until the Trip Odometer resets.
20. Door Ajar
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
The Door Ajar light will illuminate when the ignition is
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged,
ON and any one of the passenger doors are opened.
GASCAP will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
NOTE: A chime will sound if the vehicle is rolling and
a door has been opened.
21. BRAKE System Warning Light 23. HeadLights On Indicator

This light will light when the ignition key is turned to the Indicate when your headlights are on.
ON position and will remain on for a few seconds. If the
24. Malfunction Indicator Light
light stays on, it may be an indication that the parking
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system
brake has not been released, or there is a low brake fluid
which monitors the emissions and engine control
level. If the light remains on when the parking brake has
system. If the vehicle is ready for emissions
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on
testing the light will come on when the ignition is first 4
the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
turned on and remain on, as a bulb check, until the
hydraulic system malfunction. In this case, the light will
engine is started. If the vehicle is not ready for emissions
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the
testing the light will come on when the ignition is first
parking brake is applied, the light will flash when the
turned on and remain on for 15 seconds, then blink for 5
gear position is out of park for automatic transmissions.
seconds, and remain on until the vehicle is started. If the
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces- bulb does not come on during starting, have the condi-
sary. Operating the vehicle in this condition is dangerous! tion investigated promptly.
22. Low Washer Fluid Indicator
This light comes on when the washer fluid level falls
below approximately 1/4 full. The light will remain on
until fluid is added and ignition switch is cycled.
If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it 25. Airbag Indicator
suggests a potential engine control problem and the need The indicator lights and remains lit for 6 to 8
for system service. seconds when the ignition is first turned ON. If
the light does not come on when the ignition is
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
first turned on, or the light stays on or comes
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
on while driving, have the airbag system checked by an
possible.
authorized dealer.
26. 4LO Indicator
CAUTION! Indicates when transfer case is in 4LO position.
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause 27. SVC (Service) 4WD Indicator
damage to the engine control system. It also could The SVC 4WD lights will come on when the ignition key
affect fuel economy and driveability. is turned to the ON position and will stay on for 2
If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter seconds. If the light stays on or comes on during driving,
damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly
service is required. and that service is required.
28. Cruise Light (Speed Control)
This indicator lights when the electronic speed control
system is turned on.
29. Cargo Lamp RADIO RECEPTION INFORMATION

The Cargo Lamp light will illuminate when the Cargo
AM Reception
Lamp is activated from the headlight control switch,
AM radio signals usually travel longer distances than FM
located below the headlight switch.
signals, especially at night. These longer distance AM
30. TOW/HAUL signals can cause AM stations to interfere with one
The TOW/HAUL button is located at the end of the gear another. Noise from storms and power lines can also
shift lever. This light will illuminate when the TOW/ interfere with AM reception. Reducing the treble can 4
HAUL button has been selected. reduce some of the noise.
31. 4LOCK Indicator FM Reception
Indicates transfer case is in 4LOCK position. FM Stereo signals produce better sound quality than AM
signals. However, FM signals will only travel approxi-
32. Odometer/Trip Odometer Button
mately 10 to 40 miles (16 to 64 km). Tall structures or hills
Press this button to toggle between the odometer and the
can cause interference with FM signals causing the sound
trip odometer display. Holding the button in resets the
to cut out.
trip odometer reading.
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK Clock Setting Procedure

The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
the radio. A digital readout shows the frequency and/or
time in hours and minutes (depending on your radio 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune /
model) whenever the ignition switch is in the “ON” or Audio control.
“ACC” position.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune /
When the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position, or Audio control to set the minutes.
when the radio frequency is being displayed, time keep-
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio
ing is accurately maintained.
control.
On the RAQ radio the time button alternates the location
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait approximately 5
of the time and frequency on the display. On the REF only
seconds.
one of the two, time or frequency is displayed at a time.
SALES CODE REF — AM/FM/CD (SINGLE DISC) Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
RADIO WITH OPTIONAL HANDS FREE PHONE
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
CAPABILITY
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
4
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
The volume can be turned down, but not up, when the
audio system is off and the ignition is ON.
Mode Button (Radio Mode) NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the MUTE button mutes the microphone.
CD player or Satellite Radio (if equipped).
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
SEEK Button (Radio Mode) Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next the next listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
up and the left side to seek down.The radio will re- the search, press SCAN a second time.
mained tuned to the new station until you make another
PSCAN Button (Radio Mode)
selection. Holding the button will bypass stations with-
Pressing the PSCAN button, causes the tuner to scan
out stopping until you release it.
through preset stations, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
MUTE Button (Radio Mode) equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the preset station before continuing to the next. To stop the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE search, press PSCAN a second time.
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
radio ON /OFF, or turning ON/OFF the ignition, will
cancel the MUTE feature.
RW/FF (Radio Mode) Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the increase or decrease the Treble tones.
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satel-
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will
lite (if equipped) frequencies.
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
TUNE Control (Radio Mode) adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Turn the right side rotary control to increase or decrease 4
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
the frequency.
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode) adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak-
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes. ers.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade Press the tune control again or wait 5 seconds and the
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display. radio will return to normal display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
SET Button (Radio Mode) To SET The Push-Button
decrease the Bass tones.
Memory
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID When you are receiving a station that you wish to
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station Preset Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
and press and release that button. If a button is not These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button, commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
the station will continue to play but will not be stored Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
into push-button memory.
Operation Instructions - CD Mode
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in Inserting The Compact Disc (Single CD Player)
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM,12 FM and Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into push- label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
button memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
be selected by pressing the push-button twice. radio display.
Every time a preset button is used a corresponding If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch to CD
button number will be displayed. mode and begin to play. The display will show the track
number and play time in minutes and seconds. Play will
begin at the start of track one.
NOTE: SCAN Button (CD Mode)

• You may insert or eject a disc with the radio or ignition Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
switch OFF. To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
• If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio EJECT Button (CD Mode)
OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Press this button and the disc will unload and
Player and the display will show the time of day. move to the entrance for easy removal. The
unit will switch to the last selected mode. 4
SEEK Button (CD Mode)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
on the CD. Press the left side of the button to return to the reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
beginning of the current track, or return to the beginning
TIME Button (CD Mode)
of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD
seconds of the current selection.
playing time to time of day.
MUTE Button ((CD Mode)
RW/FF (CD Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
will begin to fast forward until FF is released. The RW
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
(Reverse) button works in a similar manner.
will return. Rotating the volume control or turning OFF
the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers. NOTE: RND Button (Random Play Button) (CD Mode)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate SALES CODE RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-DISC) RADIO
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO, HANDS
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting FREE PHONE, AND VIDEO CAPABILITIES
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press the RDN button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone — If
Equipped Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
Refer to the HANDS FREE PHONE (UConnect™) section
of the Owner’s Manual.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary) SEEK Button (Radio Mode)

Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio. station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if equipped) mode.
Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left
Electronic Volume Control
side to seek down.The radio will remained tuned to the
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
new station until you make another selection. Holding
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
the button and will bypass stations without stopping
volume control to the right increases the volume and to 4
until you release it.
the left decreases it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
set at the same volume level as last played.
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
The volume can be turned down, but not up, when the button a second time and the sound from the speakers
audio system is off and the ignition is ON. will return. Rotating the volume control or turning OFF
the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
Radio, CD player, Hands Free Phone, Satellite, or Vehicle MUTE button mutes the microphone.
Entertainment System (VES) (if equipped).
SCAN Button (Radio Mode) TUNE Control (Radio Mode)

Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for Turn the right side rotary control to increase or decrease
the next station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if the frequency.
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
listenable station before continuing to the next. Pressing
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
the AM/FM button continues the search in the alternate
frequency band. To stop the search, press SCAN a second Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
time. Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
INFO Button (Radio Mode)
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the INFO button for an RBDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only). will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satel- increase or decrease the Treble tones.
lite (if equipped) frequencies.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will 16 Digit-Character
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to Program Type
Display
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers. No program type or un-
None
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will defined
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to News News
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak- Information Information
ers. Sports Sports 4
Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone, Talk Talk
balance and fade. Rock Rock
Classic Rock Classic_Rock
RDN/PTY Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for Adult Hits Adult_Hits
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time Soft Rock Soft_Rock
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button Top 40 Top_40
within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to Country Country
be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broad- Oldies Oldies
cast PTY information. Soft Soft
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format types: Nostalgia Nostalgia
16 Digit-Character station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
Program Type function only operates when in the FM mode.
Display
Jazz Jazz If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Classical Classical Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
Rhythm and Blues Rhythm_and_Blues will tune to the preset station.
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft_R_&_B Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
Foreign Language Foreign_Language These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
Religious Music Religious_Music commit to push-button memory {12AM, 12 FM, and 12
Religious Talk Religious_Talk Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
Personality Personality Operation Instructions - (CD MODE For CD Audio
Public Public Play)
College College
Unassigned
Weather Weather
NOTE: This Radio is capable of playing compact discs
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
(CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable com-
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
pact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s) show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
CAUTION!
SEEK Button (CD MODE For CD Audio Play)
This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to
CD player mechanism. return to the beginning of the current selection, or return 4
to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF. within the first 10 seconds of the current selection.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio MUTE Button (CD MODE For CD Audio Play)
OFF, the display will show the time of day. If you insert Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
a disc with the ignition OFF, the display will show the speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
time of day for about 5 seconds, then go out. button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control or turning OFF
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers.
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
SCAN Button (CD MODE For CD Audio Play) LOAD / EJECT - Eject
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push-
CD currently playing. button with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode For CD Audio
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Play)
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
LOAD/ EJECT - Load is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push- Press and hold the LOAD/ EJECT button to eject all discs
button with the corresponding number where in the radio.
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙LOAD DISC⬙ insert the
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
CD into the player.
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc the radio will play the next CD. If the CD is removed and
is loading. there are no other CD’s in the radio, the radio will remain
in CD mode and display ⬙NO DISC LOADED⬙. The disc
can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
TIME Button (CD MODE For CD Audio Play) RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD
Press this button to change the display from a large CD MODE For CD Audio Play)
playing time display and small clock time display to a Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
large clock time display and small CD playing time Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
display. compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
RW/FF (CD MODE For CD Audio Play)
Press FF (Fast Forward) once and the CD player will Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly 4
begin to fast forward until FF is pressed again or RW or selected track.
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
works in a similar manner.
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
TUNE Control (CD MODE For CD Audio Play) feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone, reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode.
Press the RDN button a second time to stop Random
AM/FM Button (CD MODE For CD Audio Play) Play.
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
BUTTONS 1 - 6 (CD MODE For CD Audio Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files • Maximum number of files: 255

The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3
• Maximum number of folders: 100
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric- • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
tions.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
Supported media (disc types) 3-character extension)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.
3-character extension)
Supported medium formats (file systems)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
longer disc loading times.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of directory levels: 15
Supported MP3 file formats MPEG Sampling

The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 exten- Bit rate (kbps)
Specification Frequency (kHz)
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3 320, 256, 224,
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is MPEG-1 Audio 192, 160, 128,
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will 48, 44.1, 32
Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64,
not play the file. 56, 48, 40, 32
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to 160, 128, 144,
MPEG-2 Audio 112, 96, 80, 64, 4
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the 24, 22.05, 16
Layer 3 56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
16, 8
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title
VBR bit rates. are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 files Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3 Audio
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the Play)
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
SEEK Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next
time to start playing the MP3 files.
MP3 File. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected the beginning of the MP3 file. Pressing the button within
by the following: the first ten seconds plays the previous file.
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
CD-R media
LOAD/ EJECT - Load
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push-
to load than non-multisession discs button with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
increase with more files and folders
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙LOAD DISC⬙ insert the
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended CD into the player.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
is loading.
writing to the disc.
LOAD / EJECT - Eject INFO Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push- Press and INFO button while playing MP3 disc. The
button with the corresponding number where radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if avail-
and move to the entrance for easy removal. able).
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
time⬙ priority mode. 4
Press and hold the LOAD/ EJECT button to eject all discs
in the radio. Press and hold the INFO button while in the message
display priority mode or elapsed time display priority
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
mode will display the song title for each file.
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If RW/FF (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio, Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the radio will play the next CD. If the CD is removed and the MP3 selection.
there are no other CD’s in the radio, the radio will remain
TUNE Control (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
in CD mode and display ⬙NO DISC LOADED.⬙
Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of
Tone, Balance, and Fade.
AM/FM Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Switches back to Radio mode. Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
RND/ PTY Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Manual.
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
SET/DIR Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
System (VES威) (If Equipped)
Press the SET/DIR Button to display folders, when
Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VES威)
playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure.
Guide.
Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or
move through available folders. Press the TUNE control SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
to select a folder. Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast-
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject. coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satel-
lite Radio. This service offers up to 100 channels of music,
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
Equipped) dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
Refer to Hands Free Phone section of the Owner’s
Manual.
System Activation ESN/SID Access With REF Radios

To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site the radio OFF, press the Eject or CD Eject (depending on
at www.sirius.com. Please have the following informa- the radio type) and Time buttons simultaneously for 3
tion available when activating your system: seconds. The first four digits of the twelve-digit ESN/SID
number will be displayed. Press the SEEK UP button to
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
display the next four digits. Continue to press the SEEK
Number (ESN/SID). 4
UP button until all twelve ESN/SID digits have been
2. Credit card information. displayed. The SEEK DOWN will page down until the
first four digits are displayed. The radio will exit the
3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
ESN/SID mode when any other button is pushed, the
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any
Number (ESN/SID) button was pushed.
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Num-
ESN/SID Access With RAQ Radios
ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons
steps:
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID num-
bers will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/SID
mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button mode.
was pushed.
Selecting a Channel
Selecting Satellite Mode in REF Radios Press and release the SEEK or TUNE buttons to search for
Press the MODE button repeatedly until ⬙S A⬙ appears in the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up
the display. A CD may remain in the radio while in the and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the
Satellite radio mode. TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until
the button is released.
Selecting Satellite Mode in RAQ Radios
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to
⬙SIRIUS⬙ appears in the display. These radios will also automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The
display the following: radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before
moving on to the next channel. The word ⬙SCAN⬙ will
• After 3 seconds, the current channel name and channel
appear in the display between each channel change. Press
number will be displayed for 5 seconds.
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
• The current program type and channel number will
NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content
then be displayed for 5 seconds.
can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-539-
• The current channel number will then be displayed 7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblock-
until an action occurs. ing. Please have your ESN/SID information available.
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels NOTE: Pressing the ⬙SEEK⬙ or ⬙SCAN⬙ button while
In addition to the 10 AM and 10 FM pre-set stations, you performing a music type scan will change the channel by
may also commit 10 satellite stations to push button one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not button during a music type scan, will call up the memory
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the channel and stop the search.
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
PTY Button ⴖSEEKⴖ
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (if When the desired program is obtained, press the ⬙SEEK⬙ 4
equipped) button within five seconds. The channel will change to
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your the next channel that matches the program type selected.
radio.
Satellite Antenna
PTY Button ⴖSCANⴖ To ensure optimum reception on vehicles available with
When the desired program type is obtained, press the a luggage rack, do not place items on the roof around the
⬙SCAN⬙ button within five seconds. The radio will play 7 rooftop antenna location. Metal objects placed within the
seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased perfor-
channel of the selected program type. Press the ⬙SCAN⬙ mance. Larger luggage items should be placed as far
button a second time to stop the search. forward as possible. Do not place items directly on or
above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF button in the center. Pressing the top of the switch will
EQUIPPED increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear switch will decrease the volume.
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches. The button located in the center of the right hand control
will switch modes to Radio or CD.
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
button in the center. The function of the left hand control beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
is different depending on which mode you are in. after the current track begins to play.
The following describes the left hand control operation in If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
each mode. second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
Radio Operation The button in the center of the left hand switch changes
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next CD’s on the 6–Disc in-dash CD changer radio. This 4
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch button does not function for all other radios.
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
COMPACT DISC MAINTENANCE
The button located in the center of the left hand control To keep the compact discs in good condition, take the
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have following precautions:
programmed in the radio pre-set push-buttons.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
CD Player surface.
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
ing the disc. Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being On in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
or antistatic sprays.
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
5. Store the disc in its case after playing. is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
too high.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu- The controls for the heating and ventilation system in this
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e. scratched, reflective vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs. These comfort
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions.
oversized, or have theft protection encoding. Try a
known good disc before considering disc player service.
Air Conditioning And Heater in the snowflake button shows that the air conditioning is
on. Press the button a second time to turn the air
conditioning off.
Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed
when the air conditioning compressor is on. This is a
normal occurrence as the compressor will cycle on and
off to maintain comfort and increase fuel economy. 4
The mode control (at the right of the
control panel) can be set in any of the
following positions:
Air Conditioning And Heater Operation

To turn on the Air Conditioning, set the fan control at any Mode Control
speed and press the snowflake button located at the right
of the control panel. Conditioned air will be directed NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system
through the outlets selected by the mode control. A light allows you to operate at intermediate positions between
the major modes. These intermediate positions are iden-
tified by the small dots.
Recirculation Modes (Panel or Bi-Level) Mix

Select the recirculation modes when Outside air flows in equal proportions through the
the outside air contains dust, odors, floor and defroster outlets.
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is
desired. This feature allows for recir- Defrost
culation of interior air only. Air flows Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield
through the panel outlets in this mode. through the defroster outlets located at the base of
the windshield, and the demister outlets located at the
Panel (Fresh Air Modes) edge of each side of the instrument panel.
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the Blower Control
instrument panel. The rotary knob on the left of
Bi-Level the control panel is the
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the blower control. Turn the knob
instrument panel and at the floor. clockwise to one of the four
positions to obtain the blower
Floor speed you desire.
Outside air flows primarily through the floor out-
lets located under the instrument panel.
Temperature Control Side window demisters direct air flow specifically to the
window glass to help prevent interior fogging of the
The rotary knob at the center
glass. They are located in the extreme outside upper
of the control panel controls
edges of the instrument panel. The demisters also pro-
the temperature of the inte-
vide extra air ducts for circulation. They are in operation
rior air. You can choose your
whenever the Floor, Mix or Defrost modes are in use.
degree of comfort by rotating
the knob. The coldest tem- NOTE: When you turn off the engine you may hear a 4
perature setting is to the ex- hissing sound from under the hood for a short period of
treme left (blue region) and time. This is a normal condition that occurs if the air
the warmest setting is to the conditioning system has been on. It is not an indication of
extreme right (red region) of a problem with the air conditioning system.
the rotation.
Circulation
The cab is designed with features to promote outside air
circulation. There are grilles in the cab back panel. These
are air exhausters that provide the means for regular
exchange of cab air.
Operating Tips temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases

turning on the Air-conditioning (pressing the snowflake
Fast Cooldown
button) will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control,
For a fast cooldown, turn the blower fan rotary knob to
air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort.
the extreme right position, turn the mode control to the
panel fresh position, press the snowflake button to turn As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to
on the air conditioning, and drive with the windows direct air onto the windshield by using MIX Mode
open for the first few minutes. Once the hot air has been position on the control. Adjust the temperature control
expelled, close the windows and turn the mode selector and blower speed to maintain comfort. High blower
to the Recirculation Panel Mode or Recirculation Mode speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on the
Bi-level position. When a comfortable condition has been windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
reached, choose a mode position and adjust the tempera- defrost mode.
ture control knob and blower speed as necessary to
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
maintain comfort. For high humidity conditions it may
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
be necessary to remain in the Recirculation mode to
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
maintain comfort.
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Window Fogging Contaminates on the inside of windows can increase the
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside rate of window fogging.
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
Summer Operation Winter Operation

Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high When operating the system during the winter months,
quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstruc-
of the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50% tions.
concentration of engine coolant to distilled water is
recommended. See coolant section of Owner’s manual.
4
When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic
in hot weather especially when towing a trailer, addi-
tional engine cooling may be required. If this situation is
encountered, operate the transmission in a lower gear.
When stopped in heavy traffic, it may be necessary to
shift into NEUTRAL and depress the accelerator slightly
for fast idle operation.
Operation Tips Chart

REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER – IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow to prevent damage to heating elements. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Also, keep all
4
objects a safe distance from the window to prevent
damaging the heating elements.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 ▫ NV 233 Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
▫ Shifting Procedure - NV233 Transfer Case . . . . 210 5
▫ NV244 Transfer Case Operating Information /
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
▫ Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 198
▫ Shifting Procedure - NV244 Transfer Case . . . . 216
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
䡵 Limited-Slip Rear Axle Differential— If
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
䡵 Four-Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 ▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

▫ Rear Wheel Anti-Lock Brake ▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 237
System — (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ Limited Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 238
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
䡵 Rocking The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
▫ Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
䡵 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
䡵 Supplemental Tire Pressure Information . . . . . . . 241
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 228
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 229
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
䡵 Tires—General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 ▫ Gross Combined Vehicle Weight Rating (GCWR) . 259
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 ▫ Trailer Towing—Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 ▫ Trailer Towing Information
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Trailer Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 ▫ Trailer Tow Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
䡵 Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 ▫ Cooling System Tips—Trailer Towing . . . . . . . 262

5
䡵 Snowplow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
䡵 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 ▫ Dodge Dakota Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
▫ Curb Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 䡵 Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 264
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 ▫ Recreational Towing 2WD Models . . . . . . . . . 264
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 ▫ Recreational Towing 4WD Models . . . . . . . . . 265
▫ Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 䡵 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 䡵 Equipment Identification Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING!

The starter should not be operated for more than 15
second intervals. Waiting a few seconds between such Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
intervals will protect the starter from overheating. started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
Manual Transmission mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
Apply the parking brake, place the gearshift control lever could enter the catalytic converter and once the
in NEUTRAL and depress clutch pedal to the floor before engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a
the clutch is depressed. booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This
type of start can be dangerous if done improperly.
Automatic Transmission See section 6 of this manual for the proper jump
Start the engine with the shift lever in NEUTRAL or starting procedures and follow them carefully.
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
Normal Starting
CAUTION!
Normal starting of either a warm or cold engine is
obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
pedal. Turn the key to the START position and release engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds before trying again.
10 seconds, turn the key to the OFF position, wait 5
seconds, then repeat the starting procedure.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
If Engine Fails To Start have enough power to continue running when the key is
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accel- 5
Normal Starting procedure, it may be flooded. Push the erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
while cranking the engine. This should clear any excess smoothly.
fuel in case the engine is flooded.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the Normal Starting procedure should
be repeated.
WARNING! WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the Do not leave children or animals inside parked
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing cause serious injury or death.
serious personal injury.
Engine Block Heater — If Equipped
After Starting The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
The idle speed is automatically controlled on fuel injected permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
engines and will decrease as the engine warms up. to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three wire extension cord.
CAUTION! The engine block heater cord is located at the right front
of the engine compartment for all engine applications.
Long periods of engine idling can cause excessive
exhaust temperatures which can damage your ve-
hicle. Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the
engine running.
WARNING! Brake/Transmission Interlock System

This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving. of Park and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord could pressed. This system is active only while the ignition
cause electrocution. switch is in the ON position. Always depress the brake
pedal first, before moving the gear selector out of PARK.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Gear Ranges

DO NOT race the engine when shifting from Park or
Automatic Transmission Neutral position into another gear range.
The electronic PRNDL on the instrument cluster indicates
5
the transmission gear selected. The selector lever is “P” Park
mounted on the right side of the steering column. To Supplements parking brake by locking the transmission.
drive, move the selector lever from Park or Neutral to the Engine can be started in this range. Never use Park while
desired drive position. Pull selector lever toward you vehicle is in motion. Apply parking brake when leaving
when shifting into Reverse, Second, First or Park, or vehicle in this range. Always apply parking brake first,
when shifting out of Park. then place selector in Park position.
WARNING! WARNING!
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
it is not completely in P (Park). Check by trying to “N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
move the gearshift lever back and forth without first your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the
pulling the lever toward you, after you have set it in vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
P (Park). Make sure it is in Park before leaving the verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
vehicle. someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
WARNING!
“R” Reverse
Never use Park position on an automatic transmis-
Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a
sion as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
complete stop.
apply parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
“N” Neutral “1” First

Shift to Neutral when vehicle is standing for prolonged For driving up very steep hills and for engine braking at
periods with engine running. Engine may be started in low speeds 25 mph (40 km/h) or less when going down
this range. Set the parking brake if you must leave the hill. To prevent excessive engine speed do not exceed 25
vehicle. mph (40 km/h) in this range.
“D” Drive Overdrive Operation
For most city and highway driving. The overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec-
tronically controlled fourth and fifth (if equipped) speed
“2” Second
(Overdrive). The transmission will automatically shift 5
For driving slowly in heavy city traffic or on mountain
from Drive to Overdrive if the following conditions are
roads where more precise speed control is desirable. Use
present:
it also when climbing long grades, and for engine brak-
ing when descending moderately steep grades. To pre- • the transmission selector is in Drive;
vent excessive engine speed do not exceed 45 miles per
• the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem-
hour (72 km/h) in this range.
perature;
• vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (48
km/h);
• the “TOW/HAUL” switch has not been activated;
• transmission has reached normal operating tempera- The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to Drive
ture. if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at vehicle
speeds above approximately 35 mph (56 km/h).
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem-
peratures, the transmission may not shift into Overdrive When To Use “TOW/HAUL” Mode
and will automatically select the most desirable gear for
operation at this temperature. Normal operation will
resume when the transmission fluid temperature has
risen to a suitable level. Refer also to the Note under
torque converter clutch, later in this section.
If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the
transmission will automatically select the most desirable
gear for operation at this temperature. If the transmission
temperature becomes hot enough the TRANS TEMP light
may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out
of Overdrive until the transmission cools down. After
cooldown, the transmission will resume normal opera-
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
tion.
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-
curs, press the “TOW/HAUL” button. This will improve
performance and reduce the potential for transmission light throttle. It engages at higher speeds under heavier
overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When acceleration. This may result in a slightly different feeling
operating in “TOW/HAUL” mode, 5th gear (if or response during normal operation in high gear. When
equipped) is disabled and 2-3 and 3-4 shift patterns are the vehicle speed drops below a calibrated speed, or
modified. Shifts into Overdrive (4th gear) are allowed during acceleration, the clutch automatically and
during steady cruise (for improved fuel economy) and smoothly disengages. The feature is operational in Over-
automatic closed-throttle downshifts to 3rd gear (for drive and in Drive.
improved braking) will occur during steady braking.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage
The “TOW/HAUL” light will illuminate in the instru- until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm 5
ment cluster to indicate when the switch has been [usually after 1-3 miles (1.6 - 4.8 km) of driving]. Because
activated. Pressing the switch a second time restores the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
normal operation. If the “TOW/HAUL” mode is desired, clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission
the button must be pressed each time the engine is is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal.
started. Pressing the⬙TOW/HAUL⬙ button, when the transmis-
sion is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the
Torque Converter Clutch
transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
A feature designed to improve fuel economy is included
in all automatic transmissions. A clutch within the torque NOTE: If the vehicle has not been driven in several
converter engages automatically at a calibrated speed at days, the first few seconds of operation after shifting the
transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to NOTE: Damage to the clutch can result from starting in
the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into 2nd or 3rd gear with a loaded vehicle. Use each gear in
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not numerical order – do not skip a gear.
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter
When shifting from 5th to 6th gear, do not apply exces-
will refill within five seconds of shifting from Park into
sive knob load toward the Reverse gear gate, as you may
any other gear position.
overpower Reverse crash-through load and unintention-
Manual Transmission — 6-Speed ally clash into Reverse gear. Also, when shifting from 6th
to 5th gear, excessive knob load toward the Reverse gear
NOTE: The parking brake should be engaged before
gate will result in blocking of the shift.
leaving the vehicle, especially on an incline.
To shift into Reverse, come to a complete stop. Depress
This model is equipped with a clutch interlocking igni-
the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear train to
tion system. The clutch pedal must be fully depressed to
stop. Reverse has a ⬙crash-through⬙ lockout feature. In
start the vehicle.
order to get into the reverse gate you should start in
Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As neutral 3/4 and move rapidly into the reverse gate in one
you release the clutch pedal, lightly depress the accelera- swift motion. If you move slowly toward reverse you will
tor pedal. When launching a stationary vehicle, keep the encounter a very high load which makes it difficult to
engine speed low until the clutch is fully engaged. enter the gate.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or 6 Speed Manual Transmission Shift Speed in mph
attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal (km/h)
partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear on Accel-
the clutch. En- 1 to 2 to 3 to 4 to 5 to
gine Model Axle eration
Rate 2 3 4 5 6
Recommended Shift Speeds 15 24 34 47 56
To use your manual transmission for fuel economy it 3.21 ACCEL (24) (39) (55) (76) (90)
3.7L ALL & & 10 19 27 37 41
should be upshifted as listed below. Shift at the vehicle 3.55 CRUISE (16) (31) (44) (60) (66)
speeds listed for acceleration. Earlier upshifts during
cruise conditions (relatively steady speeds) will result in 3.21 ACCEL 15
4.7L All & & 25 40 45 50 5
increased fuel economy, and may be used as indicated. 3.55 CRUISE (24) (40) (65) (72) (81)
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired

acceleration rate.
Downshifting FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION

Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
NV 233 Transfer Case Operating
recommended to preserve brakes when driving down
Information/Precautions
steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time
The NV233 is an electric shift transfer case and is
provides better acceleration when you desire to resume
operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case
speed. For acceleration at speeds less than 20 mph (30
Switch), which is located on the instrument panel.
km/h), 2nd gear is recommended.
The NV233 transfer case provides 4 mode positions: 2
(rear) wheel drive high range, 4 wheel drive high range,
CAUTION! 4 wheel drive low range, and neutral.
When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift The NV233 transfer case is designed to be driven in the 2
one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the wheel drive position (2WD) for normal street and high-
engine which can cause valve damage. way conditions (dry hard surfaced roads).
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
4HI and 4LO positions can be used to lock the front and
rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished
by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired
position - see Shifting Procedure section for specific flashing the transfer case position is two-wheel drive
shifting instructions. The 4HI and 4LO positions are (2WD). If the indicator light is on the desired position
designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving (4HI or 4LO) has been obtained.
in the 4HI and 4LO positions on dry hard surfaced roads
If One or More Shift Requirements are not Met
may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driv-
eline components. 1. An indicator light will flash.
The transfer case Neutral (N) position is selected by 2. The transfer case will not shift.
depressing the recessed button located on the lower left
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. 5
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
NOTE: The transfer case Neutral (N) position is to be case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
used for recreational towing only. See Recreational Tow- the control knob back to the current position, wait five (5)
ing section for specific procedures on shifting into and seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require-
out of Neutral (N). ments, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer
case, located in this section of the owner’s manual.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
Transfer case position indicator lights are located on the The “SVC 4WD” warning light monitors the electric shift
instrument cluster. If there is no indicator light on or 4WD system. If this light remains on after engine start up
or illuminates during driving, it means that the 4WD When operating your vehicle in 4LO, the engine speed is
system is not functioning properly and that service is approximately three times that of the 2WD or 4HI
required. positions at a given road speed. Take care not to over-
speed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
WARNING! Proper operation of 4 wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Always engage the parking brake when powering Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
down the vehicle if the ⴖSVC 4WDⴖ light is illumi- transfer case.
nated. Not engaging the parking brake may allow
the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury. Because 4 wheel drive provides improved traction, there
is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds.
Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. The NV233 transfer
case is not equipped with a synchronizer and therefore
the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the
shift to take place. Shifting while only the front or rear
wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer
case.
WARNING! 4HI
4 Wheel Drive High Range - Locks the front and rear
You or others could be injured if you leave the driveshafts together. Forces the front and rear wheels to
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose,
Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the slippery road surfaces only.
parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position 4LO
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from 4 Wheel Drive Low Range - Low speed 4 wheel drive.
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move Locks the front and rear driveshafts together. Forces the
regardless of the transmission position. The parking front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
brake should always be applied when the driver is 5
Additional traction and maximum pulling power for
not in the vehicle. loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
N
transfer case mode position see the information below:
Neutral - Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
2WD from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind
Rear Wheel Drive High Range - Normal street and another vehicle. See Recreational Towing for more infor-
highway driving. Dry hard surfaced roads. mation.
Shifting Procedure - NV233 Transfer Case return the control knob back to the original position,
make certain all shift requirements have been met, wait
five (5) seconds and try the shift again.
2WD to 4HI or 4HI to 2WD
Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4HI can be done with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion,
the transfer case will engage / disengage faster if you
momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turning
the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition
key must be in the ON position with the engine either
RUNNING or OFF. This shift cannot be completed if the
key is in the accessory position.
NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case NOTE: On vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock Brake
will not shift.The indicator light for the previous position Systems, the 4x4 system will not allow shifts between
will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator 2WD/ 4HI if the rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In
light will continue to flash until all the requirements for this situation the selected position indicator light will
the selected position have been met. To retry a shift: flash and the original position indicator light will remain
ON. At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the 3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control
wheels to complete the shift. There may be a delay up to switch to the desired position.
10 seconds for the shift to complete after the wheels have
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
stopped spinning.
flashing), shift transmission back into gear (release clutch
4HI to 4LO or 4LO to 4HI on manual transmissions).
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4LO some gear Alternate Procedure
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
2. With the key ON and the engine either OFF or 5
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2-3
RUNNING, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (de-
mph (3-5 km/h) or completely stopped. USE EITHER OF
press clutch on manual transmissions).
THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES:
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
Preferred Procedure
position.
1. With engine RUNNING, slow vehicle to 2-3 mph (3-5
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (depress clutch on manual transmissions).
on manual transmissions).
NOTE: If steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate The NV244 transfer case provides 4 mode positions -
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift or Normal all wheel drive high range, 4 wheel drive high
if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt is range, 4 wheel drive low range, and neutral.
in process then the indicator light will flash and the
This transfer case is equipped with an inter-axle differ-
current transfer case position will be maintained. To retry
ential that allows driving the vehicle in the normal all
the selection, turn the control knob back to the current
wheel drive position (AWD) at all times on any given
position wait five (5) seconds, and retry shift.
road surface, including dry hard surfaced roads. The
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take AWD mode allows the front and rear wheels to rotate at
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. different speeds. This eliminates driveline binding and
If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and component wear normally associated with driving the
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing. vehicle in the 4HI position on dry hard surfaced roads.
This feature provides the safety, security, and conve-
NV244 Transfer Case Operating Information /
nience of operating in all wheel drive at all times
Precautions
regardless of road conditions.
The NV244 is an electric shift transfer case and is
operated by the 4WD Control Switch, which is located on
the instrument panel.
When additional traction is required, the 4HI and 4LO Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
positions can be used to lock the front and rear drive- Transfer case position indicator lights are located on the
shafts together through the transfer case inter-axle differ- instrument cluster. If there are no indicator lights on or
ential and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the flashing the transfer case position is all-wheel drive
same speed. This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD (AWD). If an indicator light is on, the desired position
Control Switch to these positions. The 4HI and 4LO (4HI or 4LO) has been met.
positions are intended for loose, slippery road surfaces
If One or More Shift Requirements are not Met
only. Driving in the 4HI and 4LO positions on dry hard
surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and dam- 1. An indicator light will flash until conditions are met.
age to the driveline components. 5
2. The transfer case will not shift.
The transfer case Neutral (N) position is selected by
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
depressing the recessed button located on the lower left
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch.
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
NOTE: The transfer case Neutral (N) position is to be the control knob back to the current position, wait five (5)
used for recreational towing only. (See Recreational Tow- seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require-
ing section for specific procedures on shifting into and ments, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer
out of Neutral (N). case, located in this section of the owner’s manual.
The SERVICE 4WD warning light monitors the electric shift to take place. Shifting while only the front or rear
shift 4WD system. If this light remains on after engine wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer
start up or illuminates during driving, it means that the case.
4WD system is not functioning properly and that service
When operating your vehicle in 4LO, the engine speed is
is required.
approximately three times that of the AWD or 4HI
positions at a given road speed. Take care not to over-
WARNING! speed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Always engage the parking brake when powering Proper operation of 4 wheel drive vehicles depends on
down the vehicle if the ⴖSVC 4WDⴖ light is illumi- tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
nated. Not engaging the parking brake may allow Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury. transfer case.
Because 4 wheel drive provides improved traction, there
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds.
front or rear wheels are spinning. The NV244 transfer Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
case is not equipped with a synchronizer and therefore
the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the
WARNING! 4HI
4 Wheel Drive High Range - Locks the transfer case
You or others could be injured if you leave the inter-axle differential. Forces front and rear wheels to
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose,
Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the slippery road surfaces only.
parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position 4LO
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from 4 Wheel Drive Low Range - Low speed 4 wheel drive.
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move Locks the transfer case inter-axle differential. Forces the
regardless of the transmission position. The parking front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
brake should always be applied when the driver is 5
Additional traction and maximum pulling power for
not in the vehicle. loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
N
transfer case mode position see the information below:
Neutral - Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
AWD from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind
Normal All Wheel Drive High Range - Employs inter- another vehicle. See Recreational Towing for more infor-
axle differential. Allows front and rear wheels to rotate at mation.
different speeds. All road surfaces.
Shifting Procedure - NV244 Transfer Case return the control knob back to the original position,
make certain all shift requirements have been met, wait
five (5) seconds and try the shift again.
AWD to 4HI or 4HI to AWD
Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
Shifts between AWD and 4HI can be done with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion,
the transfer case will engage / disengage faster if you
momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turning
the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped the ignition
key must be in the ON position with the engine either
RUNNING or OFF. This shift cannot be completed if the
key is in the accessory position.
NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case NOTE: On vehicles equipped with a Anti-Lock Brake
will not shift.The indicator light for the previous position Systems, the 4x4 system will not allow shifts between
will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator AWD/ 4HI if the rear wheels are spinning (no traction).
light will continue to flash until all the requirements for In this situation an indicator light will flash until condi-
the selected position have been met. To retry a shift: tions are met. At this time, reduce speed and stop
spinning the wheels to complete the shift. There may be 2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (depress clutch
a delay up to 10 seconds for the shift to complete after the on manual transmissions).
wheels have stopped spinning.
3. Ensure ignition key is in the ON position with the
NOTE: Delayed shifting out of the 4HI position may be engine either RUNNING or OFF. While still rolling,
experienced due to uneven tire wear, low tire pressure, or rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
excessive loading. position.
4HI to 4LO or 4LO to 4HI 4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4LO some gear 5
on manual transmissions).
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants. Alternate Procedure
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2-3 1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
mph (3-5 km/h) or completely stopped. USE EITHER OF
2. With the key ON and the engine either OFF or
THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES:
RUNNING, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (de-
Preferred Procedure press clutch on manual transmissions).
1. With engine RUNNING, slow vehicle to 2-3 mph (3-5 3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
km/h). position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not LIMITED-SLIP REAR AXLE DIFFERENTIAL— IF
flashing), shift transmission back into gear (release clutch EQUIPPED
on manual transmissions). The limited-slip differential provides additional traction
on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel. It improves traction
NOTE: If steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
when there is a difference between the characteristics of
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift or
the surface under the right and left rear wheels. During
if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt is
normal driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit is
in process, then the desired position indicator light will
similar to a conventional differential. But on a slippery
flash continuously while the original position indicator
surface, the differential delivers more of the driving effort
light is ON, until all requirements have been met.
to the wheel having the better traction.
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. WARNING!
If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing. On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differen-
tial, never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground. The vehicle may drive through the rear
wheel remaining on the ground and cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when

both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could
cause both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to
slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a
turn.
PARKING BRAKE
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle. 5
Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and

the gear-shift lever is in PARK position. When parking on
a hill you should apply the Parking Brake before placing
the gear shift lever in PARK; otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the selector out of PARK.
NOTE: The instrument cluster brake warning light WARNING!

indicates only that the parking brake is applied. You must
be sure the parking brake is fully applied before leaving • Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
the vehicle. ing your vehicle, or vehicle may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also be certain to leave an
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the
automatic transmission in Park. Failure to do so
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
uphill grade.
injury.
The parking brake should be applied whenever the • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
driver is not in the vehicle. before driving, failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
• Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dan-
gerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be injured. Children should be warned not
to touch the parking brake or the gear selector
lever. Don’t leave the key in the ignition. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
BRAKE SYSTEM The system remains operational in the four-wheel drive

In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for mode. The level of performance is reduced when the
example, repeated brake applications with the engine front brakes are locked up. This will cause the rear brakes
off), the brakes will still function. The effort required to to lock-up through the drivetrain, which may reduce the
brake the vehicle will be significantly increased over that effectiveness of the anti-lock system.
required with the power system operating.
During severe braking conditions, particularly with
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal changing road surfaces, such as ice to concrete, a slight
capability, the remaining system will still function with drop or minor pulsation may be felt in the brake pedal.
some loss of braking effectiveness. This will be evident by 5
increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal WARNING!
force required to slow or stop, and activation of the Brake
Warning light and the ABS light during brake use. Both Anti-Lock Brake Systems contain sophisticated
Rear Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System — (If electronic equipment. It may be susceptible to inter-
Equipped) ference caused by improperly installed or high out-
This Anti-Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle put radio transmitting equipment. This interference
stability and brake performance under most braking can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capabil-
conditions. The system automatically controls the opera- ity. Installation of such equipment should be done
tion of the rear brakes to prevent rear wheel lockup. by qualified professionals.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System — If WARNING!

Equipped
This Anti-Lock Brake System is designed to aid the driver Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
conditions. The system operates with a separate com- Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
puter to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces. slow down or stop.
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
The Anti-Lock Brake System includes an amber ABS
warning light. When the light is illuminated, the Anti-
Lock Brake System is not functioning. The system reverts
to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning the ignition
OFF and ON again may reset the Anti-Lock Brake System
if the fault detected was only momentary.
WARNING! When you are in a severe braking condition involving

use of the Anti-lock Brake System, you will experience
• Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natu- some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop. This is
ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor the result of the system reverting to the base brake
can it increase braking or steering efficiency be- system.
yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
Engagement of the Anti-lock Brake System may be
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
accompanied by a pulsing sensation. You may also hear a
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including clicking noise. These occurrences are normal, and indi-
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, cate that the system is functioning properly.
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
5
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver POWER STEERING
can prevent accidents. Your power steering system will provide mechanical
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must steering capability if power assist is lost.
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous If for any reason the hydraulic pressure is interrupted, it
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these
or the safety of others. conditions you will experience an increase in steering
effort and a noticeable amount of “free play” in the
steering wheel.
ROCKING THE VEHICLE TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

If vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can
Tire Markings
often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the gear
selector rhythmically between FIRST and REVERSE,
while applying slight pressure to the accelerator.
The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to main-
tain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or
racing the engine is most effective. Allow the engine to
idle with the transmission selector in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles.
This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of
transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a
stuck vehicle.
NOTE:
• P(Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: P215/65R15 95H.
• European Metric tire sizing is based on European • Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• LT(Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. • High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric standards and begins with the tire diameter molded
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced- 5
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Milimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—⬙R⬙ means Radial Construction.
—⬙D⬙ means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un-
der specified operating conditions. (ie. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions and 5
posted speed limits).
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN) Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including of the tire.
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety
standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location.(2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size.(2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer.(1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure

Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure for pas-
senger cars is listed on either the face of the driver’s door
or the driver’s side “B” pillar. For vehicles other than
passenger cars, the cold tire inflation pressures are listed
on either the shutface of the driver’s door, the “B” pillar,
the Certification Label or in the Tire Inflation Pressures
brochure in the glove compartment. 5
Tire Placard Location

Tire and Loading Information Placard Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and the Vehicle Loading section of
this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
Tire and Loading Information GAWR’s, vehicle loading and trailer towing, see the
Vehicle Loading section of this manual.
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear
and spare tires.
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
the weight referenced here. exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in step 4.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
manual to determine how this reduces the available
your vehicle’s placard.
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and 5
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
calculate total load, cargo/luggage and towing capacities
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas- of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and
sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds. number and size of occupants. This table is for illustra-
tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. NOTE: For the following example the combined weight
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392
and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (since 5 x 150 = 750, Kg).
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lb.)
WARNING! 1. Safety—
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading WARNING!

can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the accidents.
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never • Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in
overload them. tire failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause
TIRES—GENERAL INFORMATION
damage that results in tire failure.
5
Tire Pressure • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and You could lose control of your vehicle.
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary • Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle
areas are affected by improper tire pressure: handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to
the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
2. Economy— maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-

Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal Information” section of this manual.
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Underinflation also increases tire
rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure for passenger cars
is listed on either the face of the driver’s door or the
driver’s side “B” pillar. For vehicles other than passenger
cars, the cold tire inflation pressures are listed on either
the “B” pillar, the Certification Label or in the Tire Tire Placard Location
Inflation Pressures brochure in the glove compartment. The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
properly inflated even when they are under inflated. temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
CAUTION! 12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al- the winter.
ways reinstall the valve stem cap–if equipped. This
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the 5
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always outside temperature condition.
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1mile during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire side wall.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation Radial-Ply Tires

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi- WARNING!
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera- poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
and cold tire inflation pressures. them with other types of tires.
WARNING! Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in

the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
on the vehicle at any given time.
stalled at the first opportunity.
WARNING! CAUTION!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take 5
only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
tread life. When two or more tread wear indicators result.
appear in adjacent grooves, the temporary use spare
tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings which apply to your spare. Failure to do so
could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle
control.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped WARNING!

The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use The limited use spare tires are for emergency use
spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire, placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly.
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on vehicle Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first
at the first opportunity. opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure
to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
See the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section
6 of this manual.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck. And
don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
5
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
to help you in determining when your tires should be
grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth
replaced.
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the indicators appear
in 2 or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Replacement Tires WARNING!

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu- specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- unapproved tires and wheels may change suspen-
sion dimensions and performance characteristics,
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and brak-
when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread ing of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa- handling and stress to steering and suspension com-
tion placard for the size designation of your tire. The ponents. You could lose control and have an accident
service description and load identification will be found resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire
and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your
on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent
vehicle.
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, han-
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
dling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you
other than what was originally equipped on your
contact your original equipment or an authorized tire vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifi- result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
cations or capability. control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.

CAUTION!
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
may result in false speedometer and odometer read- avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
ings.
SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION
A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passen-
Alignment And Balance gers {150 lbs (68 kg) each} plus 200 lbs (91kg) of cargo.
Poor suspension alignment may result in: Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle
• Fast tire wear. will be found on a “Supplemental Tire Pressure Inflation” 5
label located on the face of the driver’s door or in the Tire
• Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided Information Pressures pamphlet in the glove box.
wear.
• Vehicle pull to right or left.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
for proper diagnosis.
TIRE CHAINS
CAUTION!
Use “Class S” chains only on the rear tires on Dakota
trucks, or other traction aids that meet SAE Type “S” To avoid damage to your vehicle, tires or chains, observe the
specifications. following precautions:
• Because of limited chain clearance between tires and other
NOTE: Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle, suspension components, it is important that only chains in
as recommended by the chain manufacturer. good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious
vehicle damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could suggest chain breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the chain before further use.
• Install chains as tightly as possible and then retighten after
driving about 1/2 mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps,
especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not install tire chains on front wheels of 4x2 vehicles.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on
method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for
usage. Always use the lower suggested operating speed of
the chain manufacturer if different than the speed recom-
mended by the manufacturer.
These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, includ- SNOW TIRES
ing link and cable (radial) chains. Snow tires should be of the same size and type construc-
tion as the front tires. Consult the manufacturer of the
Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires of
snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed
Dakota trucks.
requirement associated with the tire. These tires should
NOTE: The use of class “S” chains is permitted on always be operated at the vehicle maximum capacity
Dakotas with P245/70R16 tires. inflation pressures under any load condition.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
CAUTION! and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be 5
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
Do not use tire chains on 4x4 Dakota trucks hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
equipped with P265/65R17 tires. There may not be checked before using these tire types.
adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking
structural or body damage to your vehicle. Do not
use tire chains on the 4X2 front wheels of Dakota
models. There may not be adequate clearance for the
chains and you are risking structural or body dam-
age to your vehicle.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile
with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your

type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
All engines are designed to meet all emis- your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
sions regulations and provide excellent high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
fuel economy and performance when us- required.
ing high quality unleaded “regular” gaso-
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
line having an octane rating of 87. The
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
3.7L/4.7L routine use of premium gasoline is not
Engines symptoms, try another brand of “regular” gasoline be-
recommended. Under normal conditions
fore considering service for the vehicle.
the use of premium fuel will not provide a benefit over
high quality regular gasolines and in some circumstances Over 40 auto manufacturers world-wide have issued and 5
may result in poorer performance. endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define fuel properties
The 4.7 HO engine is designed to meet all
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance
emissions regulations and provide satisfac-
and durability for your vehicle. We recommend the use
tory fuel economy and performance when
of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they
using high quality unleaded gasoline hav-
are available.
ing an octane range of 87 to 91. The manu-
4.7L HO facturer recommends the use of 91 octane
Engines for optimum performance.
Reformulated Gasoline
CAUTION!
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.” DO NOT use gasolines containing METHANOL.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe- Gasoline containing methanol may damage critical
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im- fuel system components.
prove air quality.
We strongly support the use of reformulated gasolines. MMT In Gasoline
Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
excellent performance and durability for the engine and blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasolines
fuel system components. blended with MMT provide no performance advantage
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends beyond gasolines of the same octane number without
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT reduce spark plug
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE and ETBE. Oxygen- life and reduce emission system performance. We recom-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the mend that gasolines free of MMT be used in your vehicle.
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your gaso-
your vehicle. line retailer whether or not his/her gasoline contains
MMT.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without ADDING FUEL

MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels
higher than allowed in the United States. MMT is pro-
hibited in Federal and California reformulated gasolines.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasolines sold in the United States are required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in unnecessary cost. There- 5
fore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel Cap Holder

NOTE: If fuel is poured from a portable container, the
container should have a flexible nozzle long enough to
extend into the fuel filler tube.
CAUTION! WARNING!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
off” the fuel tank after filling. portable container that is inside of a vehicle or on a
truck bed. You could be burned. Always place gas
containers on the ground while filling.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door. If the gas cap is
sound. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use
tightened. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each with this vehicle.
time the vehicle is refueled.
Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control CAUTION!
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
could let impurities into the fuel system. performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.

WARNING! Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance, 5
• Never allow any lit smoking materials near the damage the emission control system.
vehicles while removing the cap or filling the • An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
tank. malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
running. some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance.
• When pulling a heavy load or driving a fully loaded Carbon Monoxide Warnings
vehicle when the humidity is low and the temperature
is high, use a premium unleaded fuel to help prevent WARNING!
spark knock. If spark knock persists, lighten the load,
or engine piston damage may result. Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
• The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
octane enhancers is not recommended. Many of these monoxide poisoning:
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
the responsibility of the manufacturer. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
against you.
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte- NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions against you.
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
CAUTION!
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex- Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
haust gases from entering the vehicle. vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv- 5
CATALYTIC CONVERTER ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
catalyst as an emission control device. Under normal malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not resulting in possible damage to the converter and
require maintenance. However, you must keep the en- vehicle.
gine maintained to assure proper operation and prevent
possible damage.
As with any vehicle, do not park or operate this vehicle in
areas where combustible materials such as grass or leaves
can come in contact with a hot exhaust system.
A scorching odor may be detected if you continue to run VEHICLE LOADING

a malfunctioning engine. The odor may indicate severe
Certification Label
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
istration Regulations, your vehicle has a certification
vehicle allowed to cool. Service, including a tune-up to
label affixed to the driver’s side door.
manufacturer’s specifications should be obtained imme-
diately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed.
• Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods during
very rough idle or malfunctioning operating condi-
tions.
• Do not allow vehicle to run out of fuel. This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
included on this label and shows the Month, Day, and and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number
Each axle GAWR is determined by the component in the
(VIN).
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) springs, tires, or wheels).
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, and cargo. 5
specified by purchasers for increased durability do not
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
rear axle systems. Total load must be limited so that
GVWR is not exceeded. Tire Size
This is the minimum allowable tire size for your vehicle.
Payload
Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
this tire size.
weight a truck can carry including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options, and cargo. Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure (Cold) The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
all loading conditions up to full GAWR. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
Curb Weight
properly distributed over front and rear axle. Weighing
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
specified weight limitations are met.
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added. Store heavier items down low and be sure that the weight
is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before
Loading
driving.
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation. on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
WARNING! after the vehicle has been weighed both in its ⴖcurb
weightⴖ condition, and in its ⴖloaded and ready for
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the operationⴖ condition.
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) 6500 LBS.
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle handles. This could
cause you to lose control. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
5
A loaded vehicle is shown in the following example. Note
that neither GVWR nor GAWR capabilities are exceeded.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten service life.
NOTE: The weights shown in this chart are not the
weights for your vehicle. Also, the amount of load
added to both the front and rear axles can be computed
TRAILER TOWING TRAILER SWAY CONTROL is a telescoping link that

To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve- tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associ-
hicles used for trailer towing. ated with the telescoping motion to dampen any un-
wanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
Definitions
The following trailer towing related terminology defini-
tions will assist in understanding the subsequent sec- CAUTION!
tions:
• During the first 500 miles (805 km) your new
GROSS COMBINATION WEIGHT RATING (GCWR) vehicle is driven, do not tow a trailer. Doing so
is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer may damage your vehicle.
when weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings
include a 68 kg (150 lb.) allowance for the presence of a • When first towing a trailer, limit your speed to 50
driver.) Tongue Weight (of a trailer) is the weight placed mph (80 km/h) during the first 500 miles (805 km)
on a vehicle’s trailer hitch by the trailer. of towing.
GROSS TRAILER WEIGHT (GTW) is the weight of the

Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,
equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
or GCWR, ratings.
trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for operation⬙ condition.
Consider the following items when computing the WARNING!

weight on the rear axle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer. Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment as safe as possible:
put in or on your vehicle.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the • Be sure the trailer is loaded heavier in front, with 60%
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional to 65% of the weight in front of the axle(s). Loads
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options, balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can 5
must be considered as part of the total load on your cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which
vehicle. Refer to the Certification label located at the will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer. Failure
driver’s door for the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many
trailer accidents.
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system of • All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause your vehicle.
inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 vehicle and trailer.
lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
• Connect trailer lighting and brakes using factory har-
lbs. (907 kg).
nesses only. Do not cut or splice any wiring to the
• Use an approved trailer harness and connector. If a brake circuits.
hitch is ordered, the proper wiring will be provided.
Trailer and Tongue Weight
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over- Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) means the maximum allow-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a able weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo and
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, equipment loaded on the trailer when in actual under-
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chas- way towing condition. The recommended way to mea-
sis structure or tires. sure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle
scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and
by the scale.
will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that
cannot be fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur
that may be difficult for the driver to control.
Tongue Weight is the weight placed on the vehicle’s Also, there are maximum tongue weight ratings that are
trailer hitch by the trailer. Always load a trailer with 60% not to be exceeded, as follows:
to 65% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places
• Class IV (the receiver hitch type) 1100 lbs (500 kg)
10% to 15% of the GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle.
Gross Combined Vehicle Weight Rating (GCWR)
The Gross Combined Vehicle Weight Rating (GCWR) is
the MAXIMUM allowable weight of the towing vehicle,
including passengers and cargo, and the weight of the
loaded trailer. Calculate the maximum trailer weight
(MTW) by subtracting the towing vehicle’s weight, in- 5
cluding passengers, and cargo from GCWR.
Trailer Towing—Hitches:
With a Class IV Hitch, you can tow a trailer with a Gross
Trailer Weight of up to 7, 000 lbs. (3175 kg.) depending on
your vehicle equipment. The Trailer Tow Package in-
cludes the platform hitch receiver, and a 7 lead wiring
Trailer sway control and equalizing hitch are required for
harness mounted on the hitch. Tongue weight must be
tongue weights above 350 lbs. (159 kg).
equal to at least 10% of GTW, but no more that 15% of
GTW.
NOTE: When towing a trailer, the following require- Trailer Towing Information (Maximum Trailer
ments must be adhered to: Weight Ratings)
• GCWR must not be exceeded ⴖTrailer Towing Guideⴖ
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow NOTE: For trailer towing information (maximum trailer
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four weight ratings) refer to the following website address:
(4) ratings are not exceeded: http:// www.dodge.com/towing.
1. GVWR In Canada, refer to the following website address: http://
www.dodge.ca.
2. GTW
Trailer Towing Requirements
3. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
All Dodge Dakota trucks are intended to tow trailers up
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
to 2,000 lbs. (907 kg) without added equipment or
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
alterations to standard equipment. Your vehicle may be
percentage of total trailer weight.)
factory equipped for safe towing of trailers over 2,000 lbs.
4. GAWR ratings (907 kg) with the trailer tow package.The electrical part of
this package includes an instruction sheet and wiring
pigtail for an aftermarket electric trailer brake controller.
These items are stored in the glove box.
If you regularly pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, All Dakota models require an electrically actuated elec-
stop and turn signals on the trailer are recommended for tric brake controller. A blue colored connector for electric
motoring safety. brake hookup is located under the instrument panel
above the brake pedal.
When the additional trailer lighting is connected to the
vehicle, the flasher does not provide an indication of Heavy trailer towing also may require breakaway electric
outside lamp/bulb failure. Therefore, an occasional vi- trailer brakes, anti-sway devices or equalizing hitches for
sual check around the vehicle is recommended. Once the safe operation. Such devices are commonly required by
trailer is removed the above indication will return to the state law.
vehicle. 5
Trailer Tow Wiring
The Trailer Tow Package includes a 4 and 7 pin wiring
WARNING! harness located at the rear underbody of the vehicle.
The direct connection of hydraulic brake lines from NOTE: Connect trailer lighting and brakes using factory
vehicle brake system to trailer system is not accept- harnesses only. Do not cut or splice wiring to the brake
able. The extra load may cause brake failure and you circuits.
may be injured.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle

but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
7 - Pin Connector
Cooling System Tips—Trailer Towing
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
4 - Pin Connector heating, take the following actions:
• City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission
in neutral and increase engine idle speed.
• Highway Driving SNOWPLOW

Reduce speed.
Dodge Dakota Models
• Air Conditioning
NOTE: Do not use Dodge Dakota Models for snowplow
Turn off temporarily.
applications.
• See Cooling System Operating information in the
Maintenance section of this manual for more informa- WARNING!
tion.
Snowplows, winches, and other aftermarket equip-
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat- 5
ment should not be added to the front end of your
ing, turn the “TOW/HAUL” feature on when driving in
vehicle. The airbag crash sensors may be affected by
hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on
the change in the front end structure. The airbags
more severe grades. Move the shift lever to the next
could deploy unexpectedly or could fail to deploy
lower position to eliminate excessive transmission shift-
during a collision resulting in serious injury or
ing. This action will also reduce the possibility of trans-
death.
mission overheating and provide better engine braking.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND

CAUTION!
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Using this vehicle for snowplow applications can Recreational Towing 2WD Models
cause damage to the vehicle. Recreational towing of 2WD models is not allowable.
Towing the vehicle with the transmission in Neutral can
cause severe transmission damage. Removal of the drive-
WARNING! shaft for towing is not recommended since this allows
transmission fluid to leak out.
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could ad-
versely affect performance of the airbag system in an
accident. Do not expect that the airbag will perform
as described earlier in this manual
Recreational Towing 4WD Models Recreational Towing Procedure

Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
CAUTION!
Internal damage to the transfer case will occur if a CAUTION!
front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational
towing. It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in Neutral (N) before
NOTE: Both the NV233 and NV244 HD transfer cases recreational towing to prevent damage to internal 5
must be shifted into Neutral (N) for recreational towing. parts.
The Neutral (N) selection button is located on the lower
left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. Shifts into 1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop.
and out of transfer case Neutral (N) can take place with
2. Shut engine OFF.
the selector switch in any mode position. Automatic
Transmissions must be placed in P (Park) position for 3. Place ignition key in the ON position.
recreational towing. Manual Transmissions must be
4. Depress brake pedal.
placed in gear (for example, 4th gear) for recreational
towing. 5. Shift automatic transmission to Neutral (N) or depress
clutch on manual transmission.
6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object, 14. Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar.
depress the recessed transfer case Neutral (N) button for
NOTE: Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be
4 seconds.
met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) selection button,
7. After shift is completed and the Neutral (N) light and must continue to be met until the 4 seconds elapses
comes on release Neutral (N) button. and the shift has been completed. If any of these require-
ments (with the exception of 3 - Key ON) are not met
8. Start engine.
prior to depressing the Neutral (N) button or are no
9. Shift automatic transmission into Reverse (R). longer met during the 4 second timer, then the Neutral
(N) indicator light will flash continuously until all re-
10. Release brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that
quirements are met or until the Neutral (N) button is
there is no vehicle movement.
released.
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 with the transmission in Drive
(D).
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
12. Shut engine OFF and place ignition key to the If the key in not ON, the shift will not take place and no
unlocked OFF position. position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
13. Shift automatic transmission into Park (P). Shift NOTE: Flashing neutral (N) position indicator light
Manual transmissions into 4th gear. indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
5. Shift automatic transmission to Neutral (N) or depress

CAUTION!
clutch on manual transmission.
Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans- 6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
mission is shifted into Park (P) with the transfer case depress the recessed transfer case Neutral (N) button for
in Neutral (N) and the engine RUNNING. With the 1 second.
transfer case in Neutral (N) ensure that the engine is
OFF prior to shifting the transmission into Park (P). 7. After the Neutral (N) indicator light turns off release
the Neutral (N) button.
Returning to Normal Operation 8. After the Neutral (N) button has been released the 5
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for transfer case will shift to the position identified by the
normal usage. selector switch.
1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop. 9. Shift automatic transmission into Drive (D), release
the clutch on manual transmission.
2. Shut engine OFF.
NOTE: Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be
3. Place ignition key in the ON position. met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) selection button,
4. Depress brake pedal. and must continue to be met until 1 second elapses and
the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements
(with the exception of 3 - key ON) are not met prior to
depressing the Neutral (N) button or are no longer met WARNING!

during the 1 second time, then all of the mode position
indicator lights will flash continuously until all require- You or others could be injured if you leave the
ments are met or until the Neutral (N) button is released. vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
If the key is not ON, the shift will not take place and no
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
despite the transmission position. The parking
NOTE: Flashing neutral (N) position indicator light brake should always be applied when the driver is
indicates that shift requirements have not been met. not in the vehicle.
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.

CAUTION!
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
• Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar visible.
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged. 4. Keep tires properly inflated.
• Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because 5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage the car in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.
internal parts.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PLATE
The equipment Identification Plate is located on the hood
5
TRACTION inner surface.
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road The following information about your vehicle is dis-
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause played on this plate: Model, Wheelbase, Vehicle Identifi-
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping cation Number, Truck Order Number, and code numbers
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau- with descriptions of all production and special equip-
tions should be observed: ment on the truck as shipped from the factory.
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are NOTE: Always refer to the Equipment Identification
slushy. Plate When Ordering Parts.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 䡵 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 䡵 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 286
䡵 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 ▫ Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 6
▫ Removing The Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 ▫ Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
▫ Tire Changing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
272 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER This is an emergency warning system and should not be
The flasher switch is on the top of the steering column, used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
just behind the steering wheel. Press the flasher switch vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
and all front and rear directional signals will flash other motorists.
intermittently.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
Press the switch a second time to turn off the emergency flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition
flashers. key removed and the vehicle locked.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 273
ADDING FUEL WARNING!

If using a portable fuel container, it should have a flexible
nozzle long enough to reach past the restriction in the Remove the gas cap slowly to prevent fuel spray
fuel filler tube. from the filler neck which may cause injury.
The volatility of present gasolines may cause a build
WARNING! up of pressure in the fuel tank that may increase
while you drive. This pressure can result in a spray
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a of gasoline and/or vapors when you remove the cap
portable container that is in a vehicle or on a truck from a hot vehicle. Removing the cap slowly allows
bed. You could be burned. Always place gas contain- the pressure to vent and prevents fuel spray.
ers on the ground while filling.
Never allow any lit smoking materials near the 6
vehicles while removing the cap or filling the tank.
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

Jack Location
In the Dakota, the scissor jack and tire changing tools for
Club Cab models are stowed in a compartment under the
rear passenger seat. Quad Cab model scissor jack and tire
changing tools are accessed by lifting up the rear passen-
ger seat.
The jack is secured in place by turning the jack screw
until the jack is secured into place.
A finger operated helper tool is provided to assist re-
moval and stowage of the jack. This tool must be Jack Stowage Location Club Cab
removed to operate the jack for changing the spare tire.
6
Jack Stowage Location Club Cab Jack Stowage Location Quad Cab
WARNING! Steps for Removing the Spare Tire

• Remove the jack from the stowage compartment using
The jack is designed as a tool for changing tires only. the supplied finger assist tool.
The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for
service purposes, unless suitable supports are placed • Remove the finger assist tool from jack and set aside
under the vehicle as a safety measure. The vehicle until jack is stowed.
should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid • Assemble the jack tools.
ice or slippery areas.
• Locate the tire carrier access hole on the rear bumper.
Removing The Spare Tire • Place assembled jack tool extension rod into the access
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack the truck. hole in the direction of the arrow on the bumper trim.
Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube. Insert
• Rotate the tool counterclockwise to release and lower
the tube through the access hole in the rear bumper and
the spare tire to the ground so that it can be pulled
into the winch mechanism tube. Rotate the wheel wrench
from under the vehicle.
handle counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the
ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it
out from under the vehicle. When the spare is clear, tilt
the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the
center of the wheel.
• Rotate clockwise to stow the spare tire.
6
Turning Lug Wrench and Extension
Inserting Lug Wrench and Extension
It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to Tire Changing Procedure
avoid tangling the loose cable.
WARNING!
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Do not raise this vehicle using a bumper jack. The scissor

jack is designed as a tool for changing tires on this vehicle
Spare Tire Stowage Location
only. It is not recommended that the jack be used for
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with service purposes or to lift more than one wheel at a time.
the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
Preparations • Block both the front and rear

Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or of the wheel diagonally oppo-
slippery areas. Set the parking brake and place the gear site the jacking position. For
selector in PARK (automatic transmission). On Four example, if the right front
Wheel Drive vehicles, shift the transfer case to the “4L” wheel is being changed, block
position. the left rear wheel.
• Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
WARNING! vehicle is being jacked.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the Instructions
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
1. Lower and remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools 6
from stowage.
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove,
the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. When changing a front wheel, place the jack under the When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive
frame rail behind the wheel. Locate the jack as far tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the
forward as possible on the straight part of the frame extension tube. Place the jack under the axle in the
(prior to inboard transition. Operate the jack using the positions shown with the drive tubes extending to the
jack drive tube and the wheel wrench - the tube exten- rear. Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
sion, may be used but is not required.
Left Rear Jacking Location

Positioning of the Jack Front Wheels
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle unstable and cause an accident. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. Install
the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To
avoid risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully 6
Right Rear Jacking Location tighten the nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
adjust the jack position as required.
4. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the
vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.
6. Using the wheel wrench, finish tightening the nuts in WARNING!

a crisscross pattern. Correct nut tightness is 85-115 ft. lbs.
(115-155 N·m) torque. If in doubt about the correct Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
your dealer or at a service station. • Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge
of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle.
WARNING! • Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or • Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking.
hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle. • Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
Always stow the jack, tools and the extra tire and • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
wheel in the places provided. jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
7. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow the • Only use the jack in the positions indicated.
replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described. • If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
8. Adjust the tire pressure when possible. • To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the value stem
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
facing the ground.
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
To Stow The Flat Or Spare JUMP STARTING

Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down. Slide the
wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and WARNING!
position it properly across the wheel opening.
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation, stow
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or cloth-
with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle.
ing. Don’t lean over battery when attaching
Rotate the winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If
into place against the underside of the vehicle. Continue acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the con-
to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click taminated area immediately with large quantities
3 times. It cannot be overtightened. Push against the tire of water.
several times to be sure it is firmly in place. 6
• A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam-
To Stow the Flat or Spare: Wheel retainer does not fit mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
through the center of the aluminum wheel. The tire must from the vent holes. Do not use a booster battery
be stored in a safe manner in the bed of the truck. or any other booster source with an output that
exceeds 12 volts.
Check the Battery Test Indicator (if equipped). If a light or 4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
bright colored dot is visible in the indicator (if equipped), terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
DO NOT jump-start the battery. the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged
battery.
If the indicator (if equipped) is dark or shows a green dot,
proceed as follows:
WARNING!
1. Wear eye protection and remove all metal jewelry such
as watch bands or bracelets which might make an Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
unintended electrical contact. could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
2. Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but with-
out letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake, place
the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the ignition 5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
OFF on both vehicles. of the booster battery and then to the engine of the
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have
3. Turn OFF heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
a good contact on the engine.
loads.
WARNING! 7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above

sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the
discharge battery. The resulting electrical spark WARNING!
could cause the battery to explode.
During cold weather when temperatures are below Any procedure other than above could result in:
freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged battery 1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting
may freeze. Do not attempt jump starting because out the battery vent;
the battery could rupture or explode. The battery 2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery
temperature must be brought up above freezing explosion;
point before attempting jump start. 6
3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED WARNING!

Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow
hooks. Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury or
death.
WARNING!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps and chains may break, causing
serious injury.
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles

CAUTION!
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
damage your vehicle. Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Provided that the transmission is operable, tow with the
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE transmission in Neutral and the ignition key in the OFF
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent position along with the front wheels raised and the rear
damage to your vehicle. Use of safety chains is recom- wheels on the ground. The speed must not exceed 30
mended. Attach towing device to main structural mem- mph (50 km/h) and the distance must not exceed 15 6
bers of the vehicle — not to bumpers or associated miles (25 km).
brackets. State and local laws applying to vehicles
under tow must be observed. If the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (25 km),
it must be towed on a flatbed, or with the rear wheels
raised and the front wheels on the ground, or with the
front end raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly.
NOTE: Towing the vehicle at more than 30 mph (50

km/h) or for more than 15 miles (25 km) can cause severe
transmission damage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment 3.7L V6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 ▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
䡵 Engine Compartment 4.7L/4.7HO V-8 . . . . . . . . 293 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . . . 294 ▫ Drive Belts — Check Condition And
Tensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
▫ Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance 7
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 ▫ Engine Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 ▫ Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
290 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 ▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
▫ Front Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 ▫ Axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
▫ Drive Shaft Constant Velocity Joints . . . . . . . . 309 ▫ Selection Of Lubricating Grease . . . . . . . . . . . 324
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 ▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
䡵 Power Distribution Center (Fuse/Relay) . . . . . . . 328
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
䡵 Replacement Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
▫ Emission Related Components . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
▫ Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ Front Park And Turn Signal Lamp. . . . . . . . . . 334
▫ Clutch Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
▫ Rear Side Marker, Taillamps/Stoplamp, And
▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Turn Signal Bulbs — Replacement . . . . . . . . . 336
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 291
▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplamp And Cargo 䡵 Recommended Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
▫ License Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
▫ Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
䡵 Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
7
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3.7L V6

ENGINE COMPARTMENT 4.7L/4.7HO V-8
7
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors • Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indica-
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic tor Light” on could cause further damage to the
transmission control systems. When these systems are emission control system. It could also affect fuel
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis- serviced before any emissions tests can be per-
sions well within current government regulations. formed.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system • If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will while the engine is running, severe catalytic con-
also store diagnostic codes and other information to verter damage and power loss will soon occur.
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- Immediate service is required.
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can PROGRAMS
determine if the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
installed, or damaged. A loose fuel filler cap message will an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication
For states which have an I/M (Inspection and
that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
reset button to turn the message off. If the problem
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)
persists, the message will appear the next time the
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
for testing.
turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving
the problem will turn the MIL light off. Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently 7
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test the key is turned off. This means that your vehicle’s
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do to the I/M station.
the following:
b. The MIL light will remain fully illuminated until the
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch. first engine crank or the key is turned off. This means
that your vehicle’s OBD system is ready and you can
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
proceed to the I/M station.
or start the engine.
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently
this test over.
serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal normally would in order for your OBD system to update.
bulb check. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate
that the system is now ready.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen: Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated
a. The MIL light will blink for approximately 5 sec-
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your
onds and then remain on until the first engine crank or
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
with the engine running. against you.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar威 parts for normal/scheduled
WARNING!
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in- You can be badly injured working on or around a
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
caused by the use of non-Mopar威 parts for maintenance you have the knowledge and the proper equipment.
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s If you have any doubt about your ability to perform
warranty. a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
DEALER SERVICE mechanic.
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special 7
tools and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 1. Position the vehicle on a level surface.

The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
2. Turn Off the engine and allow approximately 5 min-
services determined by the engineers who designed your
utes for the oil to settle to the bottom of the crankcase.
vehicle.
3. Remove the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should 4. Wipe the engine oil level indicator (dipstick) clean.
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
5. Install the engine oil level indicator (dipstick) and
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
make sure it is seated in the tube.
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is 6. Remove the engine oil level indicator (dipstick), keep-
observed or suspected. ing the handle above the tip, and read the oil level on the
engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The
best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes
after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
7. Add oil only if the level is below the “SAFE” range (at
CAUTION!
or below the “ADD” mark) on the engine oil level
indicator (dipstick). Adding one quart of oil when the Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
reading is at the ADD mark will result in a reading at the oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could dam-
top of the SAFE zone on these engines. age your engine.
Frequency Of Oil Change

Road conditions and your style of driving affect the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following to determine if ANY apply to you:
• Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
• Stop and Go driving. 7
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km).
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high 4x4 Models, If Used Primarily For Off-Road Operation
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C). Every 50 hours of use.
• Trailer towing, Taxi, Police or delivery service (com- Dusty Conditions
mercial service). Driving through dust-laden air increases the problems of
keeping abrasive materials out of the engine. Under these
• Off-Road or desert operation.
conditions, special attention should be given to the
• If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol) engine air cleaner. The crankcase ventilation system
fuel. should also be checked periodically. Make sure that these
units are always clean. This will tend to reduce to a
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
minimum the amount of abrasive material that may enter
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
the engine.
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual. Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
If NONE of these apply to you, then change your engine
types of operating conditions, the manufacture only
oil every 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months, whichever
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
comes first and follow schedule ⬙A⬙ of the ⬙Maintenance
the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard
Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
MS-6395. Use Mopar or an equivalent oil meeting the
specification MS-6395.
Engine Oil Identification (API) Symbol Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
There is a symbol to aid you in selecting the proper SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating
engine oil. temperatures. This engine oil improves low tempera-
ture starting and vehicle fuel economy. Refer to your
This symbol means that the oil has
engine oil filler cap for the recommended engine oil
been certified by the American
viscosity for your vehicle.
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacture only recommends For information on engine oil filler cap location, see the
API Certified engine oils that Engine Compartment illustration in this section.
meet the requirements of
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
DaimlerChrysler Material Stan-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
dard MS-6395. Use Mopar or an
ber should not be used.
equivalent oil meeting the specifi-
cation MS-6395. Synthetic Engine Oils 7
There are a number of engine oils being promoted as
either synthetic or semi-synthetic. If you chose to use
such a product, use only those oils that meet the Ameri-
can Petroleum Institute (API) and SAE viscosity stan-
dard. Follow the service schedule that describes your
driving type.
Materials Added to Engine Oils Engine Oil Filter Selection

The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi- The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad- quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
ditives. service. Mopar威 Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tensioner
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the tensioner. No belt tension adjustments are required.
environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or However, belt and belt tensioner condition should be
governmental agency for advice on how and where used inspected at the specified intervals, and replaced if re-
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area. quired. See your authorized dealer for service
Engine Oil Filter At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule, all
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine belts and tensioner should be checked for condition.
oil change. Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure.
Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts, cracks,

CAUTION!
glazing, or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication
of damage which could result in belt failure. Low gen- When replacing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
erator belt tension can cause battery failure. damage them and cause them to leak.
Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interfer-
ence between the belts and other engine components. Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Spark Plugs Under normal driving conditions, replace the air filter at
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure proper engine the intervals shown on Schedule “A”. If, however, you
performance and emission control. The plugs installed in drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe con-
your vehicle should operate satisfactorily in normal ditions, the filter element should be inspected periodi-
service for the mileage indicated in the Maintenance cally and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on
Chart. New plugs should be installed at this mileage. The Schedule “B”.
entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction 7
due to a faulty spark plug. Check the Vehicle Emissions
Control Information label for the proper type of spark
plug for your vehicle.
WARNING! Catalytic Converter

The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air catalyst as an emission control device.
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
serious personal injury.
damage.
Engine Fuel Filter

A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling, limit the speed at
which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting.
Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the
fuel tank, frequent filter replacement may be necessary.
CAUTION! WARNING!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In materials that can burn. Such materials might be
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv- grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor- haust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin- areas where your exhaust system can contact any-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe thing that can burn.
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
vehicle. engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the 7
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a
against you. tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be ob-
tained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage: WARNING!

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con-
motion. tain lead and lead compounds. Always wash hands
after handling the battery.
• Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Maintenance-Free Battery
All Dodge trucks are equipped with maintenance-free
batteries. You will never have to add water, nor is
periodic maintenance required.
To determine the battery charge, check the battery test Air Conditioner Maintenance
indicator (if equipped) on top of the battery. Refer to the For best possible performance, your air conditioner
illustration. should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
CAUTION! test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
It is essential when replacing the cables on the time.
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked (+) positive
and negative (-) and identified on the battery case.
Also, if a “fast charger” is used while battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be- 7
fore connecting the charger to battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
WARNING! Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar-
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants bon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro-
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi- tection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause using recovery and recycling equipment.
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer Power Steering — Fluid Check
to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
further warranty information. service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected DaimlerChrysler Dealership.⬙
should be done by an experienced repairman.
WARNING! Drive Shaft Constant Velocity Joints

All four wheel drive models are equipped with four
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and constant velocity joints. Periodic lubrication of these
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving joints is not required. However, the joint boot should be
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do inspected for external leakage or damage periodically. If
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended external leakage or damage is evident, the joint boot and
power steering fluid. grease should be replaced immediately. Continued op-
eration could result in failure of the joint due to water
and dirt contamination of the grease. This would require
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
complete replacement of the joint assembly. Refer to the
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
Service Manual for the detailed replacement procedure.
surfaces. Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts for correct fluid type. Body Lubrication
Front Suspension Ball Joints
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as 7
seat tracks, doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
The ball joints and seals should be inspected whenever
periodically to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect
the vehicle is serviced for other reasons. Damaged seals
against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any
should be replaced to prevent leakage or contamination
lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
of the grease.
remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and
grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to insure Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
proper function. When performing other underhood ser- the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
vices, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
should be cleaned and lubricated.
Windshield Washers
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a The fluid reservoir should be checked for fluid level at
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small regular intervals. When freezing weather is anticipated,
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar威 Lock flush out the water in the reservoir by operating the
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. system. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer anti-
freeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate the system
Windshield Wiper Blades
for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield
should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accu- in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
mulations of salt or road film. exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
containers.
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
WARNING! Exhaust System

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
Commercially available windshield washer solvents the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care system.
must be exercised when filling or working around
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
the washer solution.
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Mopar威 All damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
Weather Windshield Washer Solution used with water as seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
directed on the container, aids cleaning action, reduces to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
freezing point to avoid line clogging, and is not harmful inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised 7
to paint or trim. for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING! Check the coolant bottle tubing for condition and tight-
ness of connection at coolant bottle and radiator. Inspect
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon the entire system for leaks.
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can WARNING!
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, fol-
low the preceding safety tips. You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or
steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam
Cooling System coming from under the hood don’t open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. If you open
Inspection the hood and see steam or hot coolant escaping from
Coolant protection checks should be made at every 12 the radiator, don’t touch anything. Get away quickly.
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where Never try to open a pressure cap when the radiator is
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the hot.
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
coolant. Check face of radiator for any accumulation of
bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean the radiator core by gently
spraying water from a garden hose at the back of the core.
Cooling System Maintenance children. If ingested, contact a physician or poison con-

At the intervals shown in the Maintenance Schedules trol specialist in your area. Clean up any ground spills
section of this manual, the system should be drained, immediately.
flushed and refilled. See your authorized dealer for
Recommended Engine Coolant
proper cooling system maintenance.
This vehicle has been factory filled with an Ethylene
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill Glycol based engine coolant with long life corrosion
If the solution is dirty and contains a considerable inhibitors (called HOAT, for Hybrid Organic Additive
amount of sediment, it should be cleaned and flushed. Technology). Follow the “Maintenance Schedule” for the
See your authorized dealer for proper draining, flushing recommended coolant change intervals. Refer to Recom-
and refilling of your vehicle’s cooling system. mended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type.
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your 7
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. Do not store ethylene glycol based engine
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. Prevent ingestion by animals and
Adding Coolant
CAUTION!
When adding coolant, or refilling the system, a minimum
Mixing of coolants other than specified (non- solution of 50% recommended HOAT ethylene glycol
HOAT), may result in engine damage and decreased engine coolant (antifreeze) and distilled water should be
corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT coolant is intro- used. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if
duced into the cooling system in an emergency, it temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are anticipated.
should be replaced with the specified coolant as Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
soon as possible. water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base anti- The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of
freeze products. Do not use additional rust inhibi- corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
tors or antirust products, as they may not be compat-
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
ible with the radiator coolant and may plug the
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
radiator.
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
This vehicle has not been designed for use with the vehicle is operated.
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene
Glycol based coolants is not recommended. NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
WARNING! WARNING!
Never add coolant to the radiator when the engine is The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
overheated. Do not loosen or remove pressure cap to coolant pressure cap are a safety precaution. Heat
cool overheated engine. The coolant is under pres- causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
sure and severe scalding could result. prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pres-
sure cap when the system is hot or under pressure.
Coolant Pressure Cap
The coolant pressure cap must be fully tightened to Coolant Level
prevent loss of coolant, and to insure that coolant will The coolant bottle system provides a quick visual method
return to the radiator from the coolant bottle. for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With
the engine idling, and warmed to normal operating
The pressure cap should be inspected and cleaned if there
is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing
temperature,⬙ the level of the coolant on the overflow 7
bottle should be between the fluid level marks.⬙ Check
surfaces.
the coolant level whenever the hood is raised.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the pressure cap except checking
coolant freeze point or replacement with new antifreeze
coolant. Your service attendant should be advised of this. E. Make sure that the radiator and coolant bottle over-
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the flow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
F. Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
not overfill.
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
Points To Remember condenser clean also.
A. Do not overfill the coolant bottle. G. The thermostat should not be changed for summer or
winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
B. Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
coolant bottle. If antifreeze needs to be added, contents of
result in unsatisfactory cooling performance.
coolant bottle also must be protected against freezing.
Emission Related Components
C. If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the coolant bottle does not drop when the engine Fuel System Hoses And Vapor/Vacuum Harnesses
cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance,
leaks. inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of
heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
D. Maintain a minimum coolant concentration of 50%
cracking, checking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive
ethylene glycol and distilled water.
swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber. Particular
attention should be given to examining hose surfaces PCV valve and passage with increasing mileage. Have
nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust mani- the PCV valve, hoses, and passages checked for proper
fold. operation at the intervals specified. If the valve is
plugged or sticking, replace with a new valve – Do not
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
attempt to clean the oil PCV valve! Check ventilating
collapsed.
hose for indication of damage or plugging with deposits.
Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they Replace if necessary.
are secure and no leaks are present.
You are urged to use only the manufacturer’s specified
hoses and clamps, or their equivalent in material and
specification, in any fuel system servicing. It is manda-
tory to replace all clamps that have been loosened or
removed during service. Care should be taken in install- 7
ing new clamps to insure they are properly torqued.
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve
Proper operation of the crankcase ventilation system
requires that the PCV valve be free of sticking or plug-
ging because of deposits. Deposits can accumulate in the
Brake System WARNING!

Power Disc Brakes (Front)
Disc brakes do not require adjustment; however, several Use of brake fluid that may have a lower initial
hard stops during the break-in period are recommended boiling point, or is unidentified as to specifications,
to seat the linings and wear off any foreign material. may result in sudden brake failure during hard
prolonged braking. You could have an accident.
Brake Master Cylinders
The fluid level in the master cylinders should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the WARNING!
brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid
to bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
the master cylinder area before removing the cap. With brake fluid catching fire.
disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
pads are replaced. If the brake fluid level is abnormally
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
low, check system for leaks.
moisture.
Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts for correct fluid type.
spots. If there is any evidence of cracking, scuffing, or

CAUTION!
worn spots, the hose should be replaced immediately!
Do not allow a petroleum-base fluid to contaminate Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place with
the brake fluid. Seal damage may result. possible burst failure.
Brake Linings WARNING!

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes. Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
During normal driving, a few brake applications while You could have an accident. If you see any sign of
moving in reverse will maintain your brakes at the cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
specified adjustment. Adjustment will continue until the hoses replaced immediately.
brake linings are worn. To avoid brake failure, brake pull
or damage to the rotors or drums, inspect the brake
linings as specified in the maintenance schedule. If Clutch Hydraulic System 7
excessively worn, the brake linings must be replaced. The clutch hydraulic system is a sealed maintenance free
system. In the event of leakage or other malfunction, the
Brake Hoses system must be replaced.
Inspection should be performed whenever the brake
system is serviced or at intervals specified. Inspect hy-
draulic brake hoses for surface cracking, scuffing or worn
Manual Transmission least 15 miles (24 km) of driving. At normal operating

temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be-
Fluid Level Check
tween the fingertips.
This fluid should be checked whenever other underhood
services are performed. The fluid level is checked by To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly,
removing the fill plug. If the level of the lubricant is more the following procedure must be used:
than 1/4⬙ (6.35 mm) below the bottom of the filler hole
1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating
while the vehicle is level, enough lubricant should be
temperature.
added to bring the level to the bottom of the filler hole.
This fluid does not require periodic changing. However, 2. The vehicle must be on level ground.
if it becomes necessary to add or replace the fluid in these
3. Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake
transmissions, refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants
pedal.
and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.
4. Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear
Automatic Transmission
position ending with the lever in P (Park).
Fluid Level Check
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal
seated.
operating temperature 180°F (82°C). This occurs after at
6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on

CAUTION!
both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat- Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50°F
ing temperature. Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on (10°C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
both sides of the dipstick. If the fluid is low, add as fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to
required into the dipstick tube. Do not overfill. After produce an accurate reading.
adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube, wait
a minimum of two (2) minutes for the oil to fully drain
into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level. 7. Check for leaks. Release parking brake.
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the
between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the
dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated
with the fluid at approximately 70°F ( 21°C) (room
position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the
7
temperature). If the fluid level is correctly established at
room temperature, it should be between the “HOT” dipstick tube.
(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches
180°F ( 82°C). Remember it is best to check the level at the
normal operating temperature.
Automatic Transmission Fluid And Filter Change

CAUTION!
To obtain best performance and long life for automatic
transmissions, the manufacturer recommends that they Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
be given regular maintenance service by an Authorized turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration
Dodge Dealer or Service Center. It is important that the in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
transmission fluid be maintained at the correct level and shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
that it be drained and refilled as specified. manufacturers recommended fluid will result in
Follow the proper Maintenance Schedule for your type of more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
driving. Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type.
It is important that proper lubricant is used in the
transmission. Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants
and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type. It is important Special Additives
that the transmission fluid be maintained at the pre- The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
scribed level using the recommended fluid. dition of any additives to the transmission. Exception to
this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting
fluid leaks. The use of transmission sealers should be
avoided, since they may adversely affect seals.
Transfer Case Axles

Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks. If a fluid leak is Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
evident the transfer case fluid level may be low. Have the Parts for correct fluid type.
transfer case serviced immediately.
The manufacturer does not recommend regularly sched-
uled oil changes for axles in vehicles whose operation is
CAUTION! classified as normal truck service.
Damage may result from operation of the vehicle NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
with low transfer case fluid. result in corrosion and possible failure of differential
components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be
encountered in some off-highway types of service, will
The transfer case fluid should be drained and refilled at require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
the intervals specified.
Rear Axle 7
Lubricant Selection Rear Axle Limited-slip differentials require the use of
Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Mopar limited-slip additive. Refer to Recommended Flu-
Parts for correct fluid type. ids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.
This should be added to the gear lubricant whenever a
fluid change is made, when equipped with limited-slip
differential. Rear axle fluid level should be 1/4⬙ (6.35mm) There are two groups
below filler plug hole for 8 1/4⬙ axles and should be 5/8⬙ identified, those for wheel
(16mm) below filler plug for 9 1/4⬙ axles. bearings (Letter “G”) and
those for chassis (Letter
Front Axle
“L”) lubrication. Perfor-
Front Axle fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill
mance categories within
plug.
these groups result in dual
Selection of Lubricating Grease letter designations for
The National Lubricating Grease Institute (NLGI) has each group. The letter des-
developed a symbol (Certification Mark) to aid the ignations shown in the ex-
vehicle owner in the proper selection of grease for chassis ample are the highest
components. This symbol, an example shown below, is quality level available and when combined as shown can
located on the grease container and identifies the appli- be used for chassis lubrication. Use only those greases
cation and quality of the grease. that have the NLGI symbol on the container along with
the proper quality level for your application.
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion The most common causes are:
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
• Stone and gravel impact.
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on • Insects, tree sap and tar.
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
Washing
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under- • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
body protection. hicle in the shade using a mild car wash soap, and
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
rinse the panels completely with clear water. 7
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion • If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
resistance built into your vehicle. lated on your vehicle, wash it as soon as possible.
What Causes Corrosion? • Use Mopar威 auto polish to remove road film and
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of stains and to polish your vehicle. Take care never to
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
finish. considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
CAUTION! similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibil-
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will ity of the owner.
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly
Special Care with mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive remove heavy soil, select a nonabrasive, non-acidic
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
a month. brush or metal polishes. Only Mopar威 cleaners are
recommended. Do not use oven cleaner. Avoid auto-
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges matic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh
of the doors, rocker panels be kept clear and open. brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective fin-
ish.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
packaged and sealed. can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
and Mopar威 Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
• Use Mopar威 touch up paint on scratches as soon as soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
color of your vehicle. gents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
Interior Care
required to maintain the original condition.
Use Mopar威 Fabric Cleaner to clean fabric upholstery
and carpeting.
WARNING! 7
Use Mopar威 Vinyl Cleaner to clean vinyl upholstery and
trim. Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
Mopar威 Total Clean is specifically recommended for
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
leather upholstery.
Glass Surfaces 2. Dry with a soft tissue.

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
Seat Belt Maintenance
with any commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
defrosters or windshields equipped with a windshield
wiper de-icer. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instru- If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
ments which may scratch the elements. lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
directly on the mirror. buckles do not work properly.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER (FUSE/RELAY)
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are Your vehicle is equipped with an electrical power distri-
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care bution center located on the left side of the engine
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. compartment.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be Thess power distribution centers house new plug-in
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive “Maxi” fuses which replace all the in-line fusible links
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag. previously used. The power distribution centers also
contain “Mini”fuses and plug-in “ISO” relays. A label Center (PDC) located in the engine compartment. The
inside the latching cover of the Power Distribution Cen- I.O.D. cavities include a snap-in retainer that allows the
ters identifies each component for ease of replacement, if fuse to be disconnected, without removing it from the
necessary. These fuses and relays can be obtained from fuse block. Pressing the I.O.D. fuse back into the cavity
your dealer. reconnects it.
VEHICLE STORAGE
CAUTION!
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use recommend that you take the following steps to mini-
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The mize the drain on your vehicle’s battery:
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may • Disconnect the Ignition-Off Draw fuse (I.O.D.) fuse
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). The
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it suggests a I.O.D. cavity includes a snap-in retainer that allows the
problem in the circuit that must be corrected. fuse to be disconnected, without removing it from the 7
fuse block.
NOTE: If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for • The transfer case should be placed in the 4HI mode
longer than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect and kept in this position to minimize the battery drain.
your battery. You may do this by disconnecting the
battery or by disconnecting the two ignition-off draw • As an alternative to the above steps you may discon-
(I.O.D.) fuses located in the Auxiliary Power Distribution nect the negative cable from the battery.
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS BULB REPLACEMENT

Headlamps
LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb No.
Dome Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WL212–2
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Overhead Console Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Reading Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WL212–2
LIGHT BULBS — Outside Bulb No.

Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H13
Front Park/Turn/Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157NA
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
Center High Mounted Stoplight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145
Rear Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Removing Attaching Screw
License Plate Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Removing Headlamp Assembly Removing Headlamp Assembly

1. Open the hood. 7
2. Remove the 3 screws attaching the headlamp housing
to the inner panel.
3. Grasp the headlamp and pull firmly to disengage the
headlamp housing from the fender panel.
4. While firmly holding the headlamp housing in your

hands unlock and disconnect Headlamp bulb connector.
5. Twist 1/4 turn and remove Headlamp bulb from
housing and replace.
Unlocking Connector
6. Twist 1/4 turn and remove bulb and socket from
housing, pull bulb straight out from socket and replace.
Removing Headlamp Bulb

Removing Headlamp from Assembly Removing Headlamp Bulb

7
Front Park and Turn Signal Lamp.

• Open the hood.
• Remove the (3) screws attaching the headlamp hous-
ing to the inner panel.
• Grasp the headlamp and pull firmly to disengage the
headlamp housing from the fender panel.
NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect the connector to
replace this bulb. If the bulb socket needs replacement
disconnect the connector.
Disconnecting Headlamp Bulb Connector

7. Reverse procedure to install new Headlamp bulb into
the headlamp assembly.
NOTE: These are Halogen bulbs. Take care not to touch
the bulb with your fingers. Body oils from your fingers
could cause excessive heat buildup which reduces bulb
life.
Removing Turn Signal Bulb Disconnecting Turn Signal Connector

• Rotate bulb socket 1/4 turn and remove socket from 7
housing.
• Pull bulb straight from socket.
• Reverse procedure to install new turn signal bulb.
Rear Side Marker, Taillamps/Stoplamp, and Turn

Signal Bulbs — Replacement
1. Remove the two (2) screws that pass through the bed
sheetmetal.
Pulling Housing From Body

2. Pull the taillamp housing straight out from the body.
Removing the Two (2) Screws

3. Rotate the bulb socket from the housing. 4. Pull bulb straight out of socket.
Rotating Bulb Socket From Housing Pulling Bulb From Socket 7

5. Reverse Procedure to install bulb and housing. Place Center High-Mounted Stoplamp And Cargo Lamp
the two raised blocks passed the body.
1. Remove the two (2) screws holding the housing/lens
to the body as shown.
Sliding Raised Blocks Past Body

Removing Screws
2. Remove housing from Cab. 3. Remove connector from housing tab for more clear-
ance.
Removing Housing from Cab 7

Removing Connector from Tab
4. Turn desired bulb socket 1⁄4 turn and remove socket

and bulb from housing.
Pulling Bulb From Socket

• Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
Removing Socket From Housing
• Inside Bulb: Center High Mount Stop Lamp
5. Pull desired bulb straight from the socket.
6. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and hous-
ing.
License Lamps 2. Rotate the socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise.

1. Using a screw driver pry black rubber housing from
the bumper.
Rotating Socket 7
Removing Housing From Bumper

3. Pull bulb from socket. Fog Lamps

1. Disconnect connector from fog lamp by raising wire
harness lock tab and pulling on wire harness connector.
2. Rotate fog lamp bulb 1/4 turn counterclockwise and
pull to remove from fog lamp housing.
3. Reverse Procedure to install.
Pulling Bulb From Socket

4. Reverse procedure for installation.
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES

U.S. Metric
Fuel
3.7L/4.7L, 87 Octane 22 Gal. 83L
4.7L HO, 91 Octane, Recommended Not Required 22 Gal 83L
Engine Oil (with filter)
3.7L, SAE 5W-30, API Certified 5 Qt. 4.7L
4.7L, SAE 5W-30, API Certified 6 Qt. 5.7L
4.7L HO, SAE 5W-30, API Certified 6 Qt. 5.7L
Cooling System (includes 2.1 Qts./2L for coolant bottle
3.7L (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) 13.3 Qt. 12.5L
4.7L (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) 13.3 Qt. 12.5L 7
4.7L HO (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) 13.3 Qt. 12.5L
NOTE: All fluid capacities are approximate capacities.
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Engine Coolant Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Or-
ganic Additive Technology) P/N 5011764AB or equivalent.
Engine Oil Use SAE 5W-30, API Certified, meeting material standard MS-6395.
Engine Oil Filter Mopar威 Engine Oil Filter, P/N 5281090 or equivalent.
Spark Plugs Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine com-
partment.
Fuel Selection 3.7L/4.7L 87 Octane, (R+M)/2 Method
Fuel Selection 4.7L HO 91 Octane, (R+M)/2 Method (Recommend, Not Required.)
Chassis
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts.
Automatic Transmission Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Manual Transmission (Getrag 238) Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Front Axle SAE 75W-90 Multipurpose Type, GL-5 Gear Lubricant (MS9763).
Rear Axle SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant (MS-8985). Limited-slip rear axles
require Mopar威 limited-slip additive (MS-10111). Four ounces (118 ml)
should be added to the gear lubricant whenever a fluid change is made.
Brake Master Cylinder Mopar威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
7
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES N
T
E
N
A
CONTENTS N
C
E
䡵 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . 348 ▫ Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
S
䡵 Emissions Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 ▫ Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 C
H
䡵 Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 348 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE EMISSIONS TESTING
N
T The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold In some localities, it may be or will become a legal
E type on the following pages must be done at the times or requirement to ensure that all emissions components and
N mileages specified to assure the continued proper func- systems are functioning properly as a part of the test
A
N tioning of the emission control system. These, and all procedure. The test center accomplishes this by checking
C other maintenance services included in this manual, the On Board Diagnostic System (OBD) system with an
E should be done to provide best vehicle performance and electronic scan tool. If your vehicle has recently been
S reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for serviced, the OBD system may have been reset to a ⬙not
C vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty ready⬙ condition because the OBD system has not had
H areas and very short trip driving. sufficient time since the servicing to reconfirm that
E
D emissions components are operating properly. In most
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
U cases, a reasonable mix and amount of normal city and
L malfunction is suspected.
highway driving and at least one overnight-off period
E
S NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emis- will be required to prepare your vehicle for this check;
sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be however your dealer has the equipment and procedures
8 performed by any automotive repair establishment or required to make certain that the OBD system of your
individual using any automotive part which has been vehicle is ready for the required testing.
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 349 M
A
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES • Off-road or desert operation. I
N
There are two maintenance schedules that show the T
• If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
required service for your vehicle. E
fuel. N
First is Schedule “B”. It is for vehicles that are operated A
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your N
under the conditions that are listed below and at the
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months, C
beginning of the schedule. E
• Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C). ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual. S
C
• Stop and go driving. NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your H
coolant every 102,000 miles (163 000 km) or 60 months,E
• Extensive engine idling. D
U
• Driving in dusty conditions. ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual. L
E
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km). NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions S
listed for Schedule ⬙B⬙.
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high 8
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C). Second is Schedule “A”. It is for vehicles that are not
operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched-
• Trailer towing.
ule ⬙B⬙.
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).
M 350 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi- • Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
N
T tions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the required.
E interval that occurs first.
N Once a Month
A NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
N • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
tervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
C damage.
E whichever comes first.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
S as required.
C CAUTION!
H • Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
E
D Failure to perform the required maintenance items master cylinder, and transmission and add as needed.
U may result in damage to the vehicle.
L • Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
E operation.
S At Each Stop for Fuel
At Each Oil Change
8 • Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while • Change the engine oil filter.
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu- • Inspect the exhaust system.
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark. • Inspect the brake hoses.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 351 M
A
• Inspect the CV joints (if equipped) and front suspen- • Check the manual transission fluid level (if equipped). I
N
sion components. T
• Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
E
• Check the automatic transmission fluid level (if N
equipped). A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 352 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I Schedule “B” • Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).
N
T Follow schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle
• Off-road or desert operation.
E under one or more of the following conditions.
N • If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
A • Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
N fuel.
C • Stop and go driving.
E NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
• Extensive engine idling. engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
S whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
C • Driving in dusty conditions.
H ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
E • Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
D NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
U • More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high coolant every 102,000 miles (163 000 km) or 60 months,
L speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C). whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
E
S ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
• Trailer towing.
8
SCHEDULE “B” 353 M
A
I
Miles 3,000 6,000 9,000 12,000 15,000 N
(Kilometers) (5 000) (10 000) (14 000) (19 000) (24 000) T
E
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3 N
X X X X X
months whichever comes first. A
N
Rotate tires. X X C
Change rear axle fluid. X E
Change front axle fluid (4X4). X S
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces- C
X H
sary.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
A
I
N Miles 18,000 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000
T (Kilometers) (29 000) (34 000) (38 000) (43 000) (48 000)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3 X X X X X
A months whichever comes first.
N
C Rotate tires. X X X
E Change rear axle fluid. X
S
Change front axle fluid (4X4). X
C Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). X
H Inspect brake linings. X
E
D Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces- X
U sary.
L
E Replace spark plugs. X
S Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** X
8
A
I
Miles 33,000 36,000 39, 000 42,000 45,000 N
(Kilometers) (53 000) (58 000) (62 000) (67 000) (72 000) T
E
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3 X X X X X N
N
Rotate tires. X X C
Inspect brake linings. X C
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces- X H
E
sary. D
U
L
E
S
8
A
I
N Miles 48,000 51,000 54,000 57,000 60,000
T (Kilometers) (77 000) (82 000) (86 000) (91 000) (96 000)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3 months which- X X X X X
A ever comes first.
N Rotate tires. X X X
C
S
C Inspect brake linings. X
H Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. X
E
D Replace spark plugs. X
U Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** X
L
E Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required. X
S Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid, change filter (3.7L). X
8 Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid and change main X
sump filter (4.7L).
Inspect transfer case fluid (4X4). X
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months, or 102, 000 miles
X
(163 000 km) whichever comes first.
A
I
Miles 63,000 66,000 69,000 72,000 75,000 N
(Kilometers) (101 000) (106 000) (110 000) (115 000) (120 000) T
E
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3 X X X X N
N
Rotate tires. X X C
Inspect brake linings. X C
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces- X H
E
sary. D
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if re- X U
quired. L
E
S
8
A
I
N Miles 78,000 81,000 84,000 87,000 90,000
T (Kilometers) (125 000) (130 000) (134 000) (139 000) (144 000)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3 X X X X X
N
S
C Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). X
H Inspect brake linings. X
E
D Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces- X
U sary.
L
E Replace spark plugs. X
S Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** X
8 Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if re- X
quired.
A
I
Miles 93,000 96,000 99,000 100,000 102,000 N
(Kilometers) (149 000) (154 000) (158 000) (160 000) (163 000) T
E
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3 X X X X N
N
Rotate tires. X X C
Flush and replace engine coolant, if not done at 60 E
X
months.
S
Change rear axle fluid. X C
Change front axle fluid (4X4). X H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
A
I
N Miles 105,000 108,000 111,000 114,000 117,000 120,000
T (Kilometers) (168 000) (173 000) (178 000) (182 000) (187 000) (192 000)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3 X X X X X X
N
E Change rear axle fluid. X X
S
Change front axle fluid (4X4). X X
H Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if X X
E
D necessary.
U Replace spark plugs. X
L
E Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** X
S Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if X X
8 required.
Drain and refill transfer case fluid (4X4). X
Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid, X
change filter (3.7L).
A
I
Miles 105,000 108,000 111,000 114,000 117,000 120,000 N
(Kilometers) (168 000) (173 000) (178 000) (182 000) (187 000) (192 000) T
E
Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid X N
and change main sump filter and spin-on A
cooler return filter if equipped. (4.7L). N
C
Flush and replace engine coolant, if not re- X E
placed at 102,000 miles (163 000 km).
S
This applies only if your vehicle is used for police, taxi, ** This maintenance is recommended by the manufac- C
fleet, or frequent trailer towing. turer to the owner, but not required to maintain the H
E
emissions warranty. D
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
U
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re- L
ceipts. E
S
8
M 362 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I Schedule “A”
N
T Miles 6,000 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000
E
N (Kilometers) (10 000) (19 000) (29 000) (38 000) (48 000)
A [Months] [6] [12] [18] [24] [30]
N
C Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X
E Rotate tires. X X X X X
S Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). X
H
E Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace as neces-
X
D sary.
U Replace spark plugs. X
L
E
S
8
SCHEDULE “A” 363 M
A
I
Miles 36,000 42,000 48,000 54000 60,000 66,000 N
(Kilometers) (58 000) (67 000) (77 000) (84 000) (96 000) (106 000) T
E
[Months] [36] [42] [48] [54] [60] [66] N
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X A
N
Rotate tires. X X X X X X C
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). X E
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 S
months, if not replaced at 102,000 miles (163 X C
000 km). H
E
Inspect brake linings. X X D
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if U
X L
necessary.
E
Replace spark plugs. X S
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** X 8
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if
X
required.
A
I
N Miles 72,000 78,000 84,000 90,000 96,000 100,000
T (Kilometers) (115 000) (125 000) (134 000) (144 000) (154 000) (160 000)
E
N [Months] [72] [78] [84] [90] [96]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X
N
C Rotate tires. X X X X X X
E Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). X
S Inspect brake linings. X X
C Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if X
H necessary.
E
D Replace spark plugs. X
U Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** X
L
E Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if X
S required.
8
SCHEDULE “A” 365 M
A
I
Miles 102,000 108,000 114,000 120,000 N
(Kilometers) (163 000) (173 000) (182 000) (192 000) T
E
[Months] [102] [108] [114] [120] N
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X A
N
Rotate tires. X X X X C
Drain and refill tranfer case fluid (4X4). X E
Flush and replace engine coolant, if not done at 60 S
X
months. C
Flush and replace engine coolant, if not done at 102,000 H
X E
miles (163 000 km) D
Inspect brake linings. X U
L
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace as necessary. X E
Replace spark plugs. X S
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** X 8
** This maintenance is recommended by the manufac- Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
turer to the owner, but not required to maintain the a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-
emissions warranty. ceipts.
A
I
N WARNING!
T
E You can be badly injured working on or around a
N
A motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
N you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
C you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
E
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
S chanic.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your 䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . . 370
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
䡵 Mopar威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
䡵 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
9
368 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Be Reasonable With Requests

YOUR VEHICLE If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
Prepare For The Appointment
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make
work to be performed may not be covered by the these arrangements when you call for an appointment.
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
service history. This can often provide a clue to the The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
current problem. your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the Warranty service must be done by an authorized Chrysler,
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend that you
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the take your vehicle to you selling dealer. They know you
service advisor know. and your vehicle best, and are most concerned that you
get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer’s
dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to assure your
vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 369
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with P.O. Box 21–8004
this process. Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
want to know if you need assistance. P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
• If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you Phone —(800) 465–2001
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
In Mexico contact:
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Center should include the following information: Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s name and address
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office) Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
• Dealership name Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
• Vehicle identification number
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
9
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter Contract, and you require service after your manufactur-
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the er’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY. your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your We appreciate that you have made a major investment
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex- when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
pected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be- training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
hind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card concerns.
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract Na- See your manufacturer’s Warranty Information Booklet
tional Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922. for information on warranty coverage and transfer of
warranty.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
U.S. Vehicles Only

MOPAR姞 PARTS To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are Hotline toll free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Wash-
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your ington DC area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of
vehicle operating at its best. Transportation, Washington DC 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS the Hotline.
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause In Canada:
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra- should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
tion (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer. diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy 3V9.
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS • Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.

To order the following manuals, you may use either the
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
technicians to find and fix problems on computer-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
controlled vehicle systems and features. They show
for an order form.
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes). procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
• Service Manuals.
• Owner’s Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
maintaining, servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
of the vehicle, system and/or components is written in cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams safety tips. 9
and charts.
Call Toll Free at:

• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
• www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
• www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
INDEX
10
376 INDEX
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247,273 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 303 Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,154
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Arming Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . 185,188 Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307,308 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185,307 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,241 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196,199,320
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41,55,158 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Airbag On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,154 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322,345
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 313,314,343 Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,222
INDEX 377
Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155,157

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 72
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Keyless Transmitter Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Camper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Caps, Filler
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,318 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,222 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145,250
Disc Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251,304
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161,166
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84,184 10
378 INDEX
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Center Seat Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Converter, Catalytic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Coolant Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,61 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62,67 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Child Restraint with Automatic Belts . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Selection of Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313,343,344
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
INDEX 379
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Drive Shaft Universal Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,186 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Differential, Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Emergency, In Case of
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Dipsticks Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Disarming, Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 348
Disc Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Emission Related Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Disposal Engine
Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 10
380 INDEX
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Ethylene Glycol Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,250,312
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313,344 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,311
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,250 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Filters
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298,343,344 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302,344
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Flashers
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118,152,336
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Equipment Identification Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
INDEX 381
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245,343

Fluid Level Checks Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Gas Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248,295
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Gas Gauge (Fuel Gauge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117,342 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Gauges
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155,156
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245,344 Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 10
382 INDEX
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Hitches

Gross Cargo Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Trailer Towing . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253,255 Holder, Cup . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Homelink Transmitter .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Hands-Free Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Hood Release . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 119 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10,13
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 119 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
INDEX 383
Intermittent Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274,278 Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Key, Sentry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117,153,342
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . 118,152,336 High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . 62 Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,114 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114,127
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54,158 License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Anti-Lock Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 10
384 INDEX
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152,153 Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) . 62
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Lubricating Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118,336 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 152
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Schedule ⬙A⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Schedule ⬙B⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Malfunction Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157,295
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196,204,320
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320,345
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
INDEX 385
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302,344

Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300,343
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297,372 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301,343
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294,295
Opener, Garage Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155,201
Occupant Classification System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126,127
Octane Rating, Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Overhead Travel Information Center . . . . . . . . . . 127
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298,344 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154,315
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Owner’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 10
386 INDEX
Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Pretensioners
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . 134,138
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Programming Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . 25,134,138
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Phone, Hands-Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Quad Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 230
Positive Crankcase Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Power Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 315
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161,166,184
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,17 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161,166
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223,308 Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
INDEX 387
Reception, Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . 265 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . 267 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Remote Sound System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31,32
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,61
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,64 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 10
388 INDEX
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Shifting
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,154 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Selection of Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118,152,336
Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Service and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298,348,349 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237,238,276
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
INDEX 389
Emergency (Jump Starting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Theft System Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Steering Theft System Disarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223,308 Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . 229,230,241
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Storage Compartment, Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,233
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Supplemental Tire Pressure Information . . . . . . . . 241 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Tachometer ........... ....... . . . . . . . . . . 155 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Tailgate . . . ........... ....... . . . . . . . . . . 143 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Taillights . . ........... ....... . . . . . . . . . . 336 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 152 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 10
390 INDEX
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229,230 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224,233 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199,320
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196,199,320
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320,322,345
INDEX 391
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196,204,320 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . 152
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Transmitter Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Weight Load Carrying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118,152,336 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Wheel Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Unlock, Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230,252 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,186 10
392 INDEX
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120,121,310 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120,310 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

2005 Dakota Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2005 Dakota Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2005 Dakota Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS

▫ Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 ▫ Automatic Locking Mode (If Equipped) . . . . . .38

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Key-In-Ignition Reminder

DOOR LOCKS WARNING!

Power Door Locks

Vehicles equipped with power door locks can be locked

Child Protection Door Lock

WARNING! REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY

Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.

NOTE: After setting the child protection door lock

8. Using the fob to be programmed, press and release Battery Replacement

The control on the left front door has up-down switches

ignition is turned OFF or the driver’s door is opened.

Sliding Rear Window WIND BUFFETING

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will

WARNING! Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental

the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The WARNING!

• Do not modify the front seat center console or center WARNING!

Maintaining Your Airbag System Enhanced Accident Response System

NOTE: The Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch is not

Children Too Large for Booster Seats WARNING!

the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard position, but

Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint

Child Restraint Tether Anchor WARNING!

Tether Strap at the Front Passenger Seat (Club Cab)

Tether Straps at the Rear Passenger Seat (Club Cab)

through the anchor strap outer loop (webbing material

Tether Straps at the Rear Passenger Seat (Quad Cab)

Multiple Child Restraint Quad Cab

WARNING! ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 ▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

▫ Erasing Homelink Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 䡵 Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped . . . 142

MIRRORS Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped

Electric Remote-Control Mirrors

To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left

WARNING! HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —

Voice Command Tree Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone

Dial by Saying a Number Call by Saying a Name

Call Continuation UConnect™ System Features

Barge In - Overriding Prompts Phone and Network Status Indicators

• Performance, such as, audio clarity, echo. and loud- Reset

North American English SEATS

Front Seats Manual Seat Recliners

Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment — If

To lower the head restraint, depress the release button

6 - Way Power Seat Adjuster — Driver’s Side Only

control seat height. Change the seat angle by using the

Up, Down, Forward, and Rearward

Secondary Latch Location (Push Down)

LIGHTS Interior Lights

Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and Lights-on Reminder

CARGO Light — If Equipped MULTIFUNCTION CONTROL LEVER

The cargo lights are turned on by pressing on the